Home

Cadillac 2009 Automobile User Manual

1. United States version shown Canada similar 3 4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following A M A Outlet Adjustment on page 3 31 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 34 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Shift Lever and Range Selection Mode See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 29 Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 Analog Clock on page 3 26 Audio System s on page 3 75 StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 Rear Park Aid Disable Button See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 42 Tilt Wheel on page 3 6 Exterior Lamps on page 3 16 DOD Dome Lamp Override on page 3 23 Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 23 Fog Lamps on page 3 22 Automatic Transfer Case Control See Escalade Two Mode Hybrid Supplement for more information Cruise Control on page 3 13 Heated Steering Wheel on page 3 6 If Equipped Horn on page 3 6 Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 115 Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 27 Pedal Adjust Button See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 27 Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button See Windshield Washer on page 3 11 Power Assist Steps on page 2 16 If Equipped Glove Box on page 2 62 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on top of the st
2. 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 75 Tire Chains cs cceetadvastva sesderandieetsa ct ETENEE 6 76 If a Tire Goes Flat ce ceeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eee ees 6 77 Changing a Flat Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ernie 6 78 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 79 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Vite icc causdin cc inir eeens e NAE 6 84 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 89 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 92 Spare TS sec sc satcaeais adqesmna seated ne aaaea e bees 6 96 Appearance Care c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 96 Interior Cleaning 02 cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee een ees 6 96 Fabric Carpet siioni aianei 6 98 Leather fe scciicis cacuineancnvescatensieteaniendeneeancnssheadieuns 6 98 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces oaeee eenen 6 99 Wo od PanelS rens rri ioana SE 6 100 Speaker Covers ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 100 6 2 Care of Safety Belts ec ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee e ees 6 100 WeatherstripS 0 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 100 Washing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeee eee 6 100 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 06 5 6 101 Finish Gare eciseviceieiiossassseteeisiscseseesctevevesevend 6 101 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 6 102 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels QMO TUNN ais tee ores cens ae E aE EEE 6 102 WIRCSHatuccns acs a ea 6 10
3. 0cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 65 Rear Seat Audio RSA System eee 3 113 Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 87 3 97 Rear Side Window Antenna 0 0eeeee 3 117 REAl SOLAS siecia anie ias 2 65 Rear Vision Camera RVC o ae 2 48 Rear Window Washer Wiper eeeeeeeeeees 3 12 Rearview Mirrors 2 2 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 40 Automatic Dimming osese 2 40 Rearview Mirrors cont Reclining Seatbacks Power 0 sc eeeeeeeeees 1 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 13 Recovery HOOKS c eceeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseees 5 32 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeeeee 5 40 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 8 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 0 2 4 Remote Vehicle Start ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 8 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire iieiaeie iiaae 6 84 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 6 79 Replacement Bulbs eceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 6 53 Replacement Parts WaINTEMANCE saaien ae a a ER 7 15 Reporting Safety Defects General Motors ccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 U S Government 0cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 00 1 95 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash o ccvesscsndeanecciantecsesaivet
4. T ay Type TV Auto Angle Mark PBC Off OSD Lang ENG pass ay Captions On Disc Menu ENG Screen Saver On Parental Last Memory On ae Normal TV Letter Box Load Factory Setting To reset all options to factory defaults 1 Press the SETUP button on the remote control 2 Use the left right and down navigation arrows on the remote control to select the Default sub menu under the Preference Page 3 Press the right navigation arrow then press ENTER to reset This function will not affect the parental setting 3 107 Settings for Parental Control Use the SETUP MENU to access the parental control feature It allows for control of the type of movie rating content from G to Adult that can be viewed and is only accessible when no disc is loaded To setup the Parental Control 1 Press the SETUP button on the remote control 2 Use the left right and down navigation arrows on the remote control to select the Parental sub menu under the Preference Page 3 Press the SETUP button and use the right and up down navigation arrows to select any one of the available Rating settings from the display menu The Rating settings are e Kid SAF e G PG13 PGR e R e NC 17 e ADULT 4 Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection 3 108 amp Preference Page Type TV PBC Audio Subtitle Disc Menu Parental Default 7 NC17 8 ADULT Set PG 13
5. 5 33 Tire and Loading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Aaa or A Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x label attached below the door lock post striker 5 34 The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6 56 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle
6. Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C The hot check is the most accurate method to check the fluid level The hot check should be performed at the first opportunity in order to verify the cold check The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases so it is important to ensure the transmission temperature is within range 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 5 Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick If the fluid level is not within the HOT band and the transmission temperature is between 160 F and 200 F 71 C and 93 C add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band If the fluid level is low add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill If the fluid level is in the acceptab
7. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD 3 95 Recommended Action Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or See your dealer retailer the headphones for assistance The DVD is playing but Check that the RSE video there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound DVD player The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes 3 96 DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle has The video screen might display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error Displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error D
8. If your vehicle has bucket seats the seatbacks can be reclined the seats can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright position do the following 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position To recline the seatback do the following A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their norm
9. Insert the new battery positive side facing up Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle It may also start up the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON RUN position During a remote start the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures During a remote start if your vehicle has an automatic climate control system and heated seats the heated seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system during remote start you will need to manually turn the heated seats on and off See Heated Seats on page 1 5 for additional information Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel If your vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However t
10. ROYAL OAK MI OnStar Download Screen 4 36 Select Go the navigation system calculates route s Select a route i e Shortest Route and Start Guidance Select Map the navigation system displays the Destination Map Screen Select Call the navigation system initiates a call to your destination with your Bluetooth phone if available or OnStar Hands Free Calling if minutes are available Select Add to Address Book the navigation system copies the downloaded destination to the address book and displays the new address book entry Select Back the navigation system cancels your OnStar Destination Download and returns to the previous screen The downloaded address will not be added to the previous destinations Route Guidance Not Active Important Notes regarding OnStar Destination If an OnStar destination is downloaded while route da ee guidance is not active the navigation system displays e If the navigation system is turned off when the an OnStar Destination Download Screen and operations destination download is attempted the navigation will continue as outlined in the Using OnStar Destination system will automatically turn on and display the Download section OnStar Destination Download Screen The radio will remain on after the download occurs Route Guidance Active e If OnStar downloads a destination and the address is If OnStar downloads a destination while route not found in the mapping disc s database
11. This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System If there are three round Light Emitting Diode LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons follow the instructions below 2 55 This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home automation devices Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist with programming the transmitter Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends See Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons later in this section Park the vehicle outside of the garage when programming a garage door Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being programmed 2 56 Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to learcar2u com
12. Touch the Map Database Information screen button to view the coverage areas of the map DVD 4 47 Off Road Mode To turn the Off road mode on or off do the following 1 Press the CONFIG hard key 2 Press the Nav screen button 3 Press the Off Road mode screen button The button will be highlighted when the feature is on When the off road mode is turned on the navigation system will show the path being traveled by the vehicle when not on a marked road This path will be a simulation since the map database coverage will not have these roads on the DVD This path will be stored in the navigation system s memory see Previous Destination under Destination on page 4 25 for more information See Off Road Driving in the Index of your vehicle s owner manual for more information about off road driving 4 48 Traffic Options Read the following Options descriptions to understand how the XM NavtTraffic operates XM NavtTraffic USA and Canada Vehicles with the navigation system have an XM NavtTraffic receiver XM NavTraffic is a subscription service provided via XM Satellite Radio XM NavtTraffic provides real time traffic information fully integrated to the navigation system to display current traffic conditions for a driver s chosen route XM NavTraffic allows drivers to make the most informed timesaving routing decisions If the Traffic touch screen button is pressed or if an at
13. 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com cadillac Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place e Digital owner manual warranty information and more e Online service and maintenance records e Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide e Exclusive privileges and offers e Recall notices for your specific vehicle e OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links Cadillac www cadillac com Cadillac Merchandise www cadillaccollection com Help Center www cadillac com helpcenter FAQ e Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to e My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area e My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers e My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profi
14. 6 104 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN w SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for the vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 113 for the vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if parts need to be ordered The label has the following information e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Model designation e Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the
15. E Leisure tid BL ATM El Restaurant Hotel 1 Select one of the POI categories to display the POI Automobile icon at the top of the map screen Select the POI e i category again to delete the POI icon l Hotels Other Restaurants Shopping 2 Up to five categories can display on the map List all categories drD screen ESS C EE 3 Press the Show POI screen button to add more POI icons 2 Use the scroll arrows to move up and down the list 3 Use the sorting screen buttons Dist distance Icon Name and on Route as needed More Select to view more POI categories 4 22 Go Select this screen button next to the desired POI to make this POI a destination or a stopover Select a POI name to receive information about the POI From this screen you can select Address Book Go Map or Call if Bluetooth or OnStar personal calling is activated Address Book Press to add this POI to the address book See Nav under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for information on editing address book entries Go Select to make this POI a destination or a stopover Map Select to display the map showing the location of the POI Call Select to dial the phone number using your Bluetooth phone if paired with the vehicle or the OnStar HandsFree Calling system For more information about Bluetooth calling see Bluetooth on page 3 75 For more information about OnStar HandsFree calling see
16. Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 year 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Cadillac Technician Roadside Service U S only Cadillac s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service It provides every Cadillac owner in the United States with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and where available a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on site service A dealer technician will travel to your location within a 30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership If beyond this radius we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessar
17. Problems with Route Guidance Inappropriate route guidance may occur under one or more of the following conditions e You have not turned onto the road indicated e Route guidance may not be available when using automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn e The route may not be changed when using automatic rerouting e There is no route guidance when turning at an intersection e Plural names of places may be announced occasionally e It may take a long time to operate automatic rerouting during high speed driving e Automatic rerouting may display a route returning to the set stopover if you are heading for a destination without passing through a set stopover e The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a regulation by time or season or any other regulation which may be given e Some routes may not be searched e The route to the destination may not be shown if there are new roads if roads have recently changed or if certain roads are not listed on the map DVD See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4 61 To recalibrate the vehicle s position on the map see your dealer retailer If the System Needs Service If your system needs service and you have followed the steps listed here and still are experiencing problems see your dealer retailer for assistance Ordering Map DVDs The map DVD in your vehicle is the most up to date information available when your vehicle was produced The map DVD is update
18. See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE LEFT HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY On some models this message will be displayed when the left headlamp is out and needs to be serviced See LED Lighting on page 6 51 for more information SERVICE PARKING ASSIST This message displays if there is a problem with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system Do not use this system to help you park See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 42 for more information See your dealer retailer for service SERVICE RIGHT HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY On some models this message will be displayed when the right headlamp is out and needs to be serviced See LED Lighting on page 6 51 for more information SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system and this message displays both SBZA displays will remain on indicating there is a problem with the SBZA system If these displays remain on after continued driving the system needs service See your dealer retailer See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 44 for more information SERVICE STABILITR
19. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle See Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 for important information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips 5 35 A 5 36 Example 1 Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 700 Ibs 317 kg Example 2 Item Description Totali A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 136 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific
20. Tire Chains A CAUTION Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly re adjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the rear tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In
21. cc cece ccc eececeec eee niian 1 10 Seats cont Head Restraints 0ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 1 2 Heated and Cooled Seats cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 Heated Seats iseinean e o aas 1 5 Heated Seats Rear cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeen ees 1 10 Power Lumbar sssisiciseeeeiccereiulAceacatasivcsielases 1 4 Power Reclining Seatbacks cceeeeeeeeeeee 1 8 Power Seats corriere nai ea a aa 1 3 Third Row Seat ccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 25 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeeeeeee eterna 6 89 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position eeeeeeeeeee 1 75 Rear Seat Position ccceceeeeeeeeeeenee een ees 1 71 Right Front Seat Position eeeeeeeeee eee 1 76 Security LiQht e E E slat aerceiaes 3 45 DOIVICE E EE chan tnet see E E E 6 3 Accessories and Modifications 6 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle sraoin a rE E E E 6 5 Doing Your Own Work sisi iirriirsarinseaniriitenitis 6 4 Engine Soon Lamp cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 3 42 Parts Identification Label cee 6 105 Publications Ordering Information 0 5 8 15 Scheduling Appointments ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 10 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 93 Sheet Metal Damage ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 103 Shifting Qutiol Park sesccisiies is rierien iioi 2 37 SNMG Nto PaK aans kienean enc
22. e Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations e Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs flowers trees or grasses or disturb wildlife This includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground e Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving e Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns e Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one of them For vehicles with a winch be sure to read the winch instructions In a remote area a winch can be handy if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it properly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off roading requires some new and different skills Tune your senses to different kinds
23. e Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 CAUTION Continued 6 56 CAUTION Continued e Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure e Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 6 63 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving 22 Inch Tires If your vehicle has the optional 22 inch P285 45R22 size tires they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use The low profile wide tread design is not recommended for off road driving See Off Road Driving on page 5 13 for additional information Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall The following illustration is an example of a typical P Metric tire sidewall TPC SPEC 153 S pasl75Rig v E QO XY 3 2 ot MOL oy oe Ne Passenger P Metric Tire A Tire Size
24. e The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired e There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle e Drive it only with the windows completely down e Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when y
25. on the back of the floor console and in the rear cargo area on the passenger side To use an accessory power outlet remove the protective cap When not in use always cover the accessory power outlet with the protective cap Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs The accessory power outlets are powered even when the ignition is in LOCK OFF Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is in LOCK OFF may cause the vehicle s battery to run down Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Do not use equipment exceeding the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only 3 25 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter The f
26. the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir Also see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 34 for more information DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The customization preferences are automatically recalled To change cu
27. 3 42 WINTEN 2 cccsendcises rerne a a REE REE 5 29 Compartment Overview 0 c eeeeeeeeeee ees 6 14 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 27 COOMA aape enni cases catsudteukes EN 6 25 DVD Coolant Heater ccceceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 2 28 Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 87 3 97 Coolant Temperature Gage 0eeeeeee 3 41 Engine cont Cooling System cccceeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeaeeeeeaeees 6 24 Drive Belt Routing eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 EXMAUSE osei aika mungad a a mleseas decay 2 38 Fani NoiSe sic dscdeviavsuesedincetenianneseeneaeemedetet cade 6 33 oE EE ches cotindesl E T 6 15 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 6 33 Overheating viet vtech rie aina Ee 6 30 Slang eaa erra Ea eE EAE EEEE atten 2 26 Engine Oil Life System csescuienisdsddieictis Bigot sleveeeete ai 6 18 Enty LIQnuinG sargen ee aE 3 23 Event Data Recorders c eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 Exit MIGMniGhccsd inan enaa wheat oap na a adain 3 23 Extender Safety Belt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 51 Exterior Lamp creso ie eies dines haves viens 3 16 Features Memory rosei aaa E E A 1 7 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ccccececeeeeeneeeeeneeee ee 6 19 Finish Damages crn ccctsanckntawtavenentareetachon totes 6 103 Flashers Hazard Warning seeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 6 FlaSh t0 PaSS eroian anie orana aini A 3 9 Flat Tire sudie
28. 88 3MHz e CH2 88 7MHz e CH3 89 1MHz e CH4 89 5MHz e CH5 89 9MHz e CH6 90 3MHz MENU Press to enter the DVD disc menu while the disc is playing A v lt gt Navigation Arrows Press to navigate through menus ENTER Press to enter a selected function or to begin playback of the disc REPEAT 4 Press to repeat part or all of a chapter title track or the entire disc after using the A B button to setup repeat preset sections RETURN lt This button is not used with the system A B This button is used to setup repeat preset sections Press this button once while the disc is playing to select the starting position Press a second time to select the end position Press a third time to turn the function off To view the preset section press 4 AUTO MEMORY This button is not used with the system SEARCH SKIP This button is not used with the system ERASE ADD This button is not used with the system R S This button is not used with the system 3 103 TITLE Press to enter the disc title mode The title feature is disc specific and may not be available on all discs SUBTITLE Press to change the subtitle language to another available language or to turn subtitles off ANGLE Press to select a different viewing angle for discs that are recorded with different camera angles AUDIO Press to select a different language for discs that are recorded with different languages 0 9 Numbers The
29. A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child lower attachments B restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 1 64 Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Second Row 60 40 Third Row Three Passenger Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors
30. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be attached using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 1 63 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle
31. C engine temperature e Protects against rust and corrosion e Will not damage aluminum parts e Helps keep the proper engine temperature Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice f extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information on location The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark If it is not you may
32. Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected t
33. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your truck can carry Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to There is also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See
34. Heated and REAR Cooled Seats J Air Delivery Mode 5 H Fan Control Control Dual Automatic Climate Control Off Press the driver side temperature knob to System turn the climate control system off Outside air still The heating cooling and ventilation in the vehicle can enters the vehicle and is directed to the floor This be controlled with this system The vehicle also has direction can be changed by pressing the mode button a flow through ventilation system described later in The temperature can also be adjusted using either this section temperature knob Press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the defrost button the AUTO button driver s side temperature knob or the air conditioning button to turn the system on when it is off Driver and Passenger Side Temperature Knob The driver and passenger side temperature knobs are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver or passenger s side of the vehicle The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off This is possible since outside air always flows through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode See Recirculation later in this section Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats shown Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase A Driver and Passenger D Recirculation or decrease the cabin temperature The display will
35. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or the positive terminal of the good battery Use a missing insulation If they do you could get a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one 6 43 8 Now connect the black negative cable to the Notice If the jumper cables are connected or negative terminal of the good battery Use a removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would Do not let the other end touch anything until the not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always next ste
36. M Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 34 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 6 113 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the TA engine oil fill cap hAM Meili SAE 5W 30 Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the d
37. See Analog Clock on page 3 26 to change the analog clock time To set the time for the navigation system 1 Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until the time is selected or touch the time screen button 2 Press the Hours and Minutes minus and plus signs to decrease or to increase the time See Setting the Clock under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information Entering an Address and Point of Interest and Storing Preset Destinations Entering an Address Enter a destination by inputting the city name first 1 If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted skip to Step 5 2 Press D to turn the system on Insert the DVD map disc See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more information A caution may appear Touch the OK screen button to proceed 5 Press the DEST hard key 6 Press the Address Entry screen button 7 Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province 8 10 Once a state or province has been selected the City name category is automatically selected for entry If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available cities S
38. Temperature Controls E Rear Window show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing B AUTO Defogger Set the passenger temperature setting to match the C Defrost F Air Conditioning driver temperature setting by pressing the passenger temperature knob 3 27 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature the air delivery and the fan speed Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode 1 Press the AUTO button When AUTO is selected the display will change to show the current temperature s and AUTO come on the display The current delivery mode and fan speed will also be displayed for approximately five seconds When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run when the outside temperature is over about 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet may automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down the vehicle The light on the button comes on in recirculation 3 28 2 Set the driver s and passenger s temperature To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Use the driver or passenger temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If a temper
39. The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee 8 15 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle
40. These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such
41. Windshield Washer Fluid eeeeeeeee eee es 6 34 Brakes nerone a E Ei 6 36 Batey fecccie chia ae sadel ny ahaeeteaksa n aia 6 39 Jump SLANTING erene aeaa a e ch E ance 6 40 All Wheel Drive 0 rererere 6 45 Rear AXl usasa aaa OE 6 46 Front Axle siciccscicagiecictiasl aer a i 6 47 Headlamp Aiming i a 6 48 Bulb Replacement annn 6 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 6 51 HED LIGANO asc cc2accecacseesnedsesaceeane aactentacantoace 6 51 Back Up Lamps miseire a Goan 6 51 License Plate Lamp seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 53 Replacement Bulbs seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 6 54 a E 6 56 Tire Sidewall Labeling c seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 57 Tire Terminology and Definitions 0 6 59 Inflation Tire Pressure cceeeeeeeeeeee ere ee 6 62 High Speed Operation eseeeeeeeeeee seen ees 6 63 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 eeeeeeees 6 64 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 00008 6 65 Tire Inspection and Rotation eee 6 69 When It Is Time for New Tires ccce 6 70 Buying New Tires scsciscscatviees eiietendieee elaine 6 71 Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 006 6 73 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeeees 6 73 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 75 Wheel Replacement
42. and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle saf
43. color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle e Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Cadillac Owner Privileges Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow
44. conditioning compressor automatically turns off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the air conditioning compressor turns back on You can continue to drive your vehicle If this message continues to appear have the system repaired by your dealer retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the engine oil becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 41 ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 30 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 41 See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice lf you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 30 for more informati
45. e Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol i
46. iso cecat notion S eee is eee 5 40 Towing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 40 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 5 40 Level Control seritsin a adverts 5 43 AUTON irena eeii eie iaa 5 44 TOWING a Trail r scsicesosimiiorsiennerseniieunn 5 44 Trailer Recommendations o 5 57 5 1 Your Driving the Road and Defensive Driving the Vehicle Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to 5 wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition e Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you
47. it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put the automatic transmission in P Park or a manual transmission in Neutral before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in Neutral Notice If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and negative terminal locations on that vehicle Your vehicle has a remote positive jump starting terminal and a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use these remote terminals instead of the terminals on the battery If the vehicle has a remote positive terminal it is located under a red plastic cover at the positive
48. oar WO LY Select an icon from the list 5 Touch the Name screen button and use the alpha keyboard to edit or add the name To add a voice tag to an address book entry 6 Touch the OK screen button to save your changes 1 Select the CONFIG hard key then touch the Back screen button to return to the 2 Select the NAV screen button Address Book information screen 3 Select the Edit View Address Book screen button 4 46 Select the Add Voice Tag screen button The system will ask for you to state the name You will have four seconds to state the name The system will respond back with the name and prompt you to repeat the name for confirmation To delete an address book entry i aPfon Select the CONFIG hard key Select the NAV screen button Select the Edit View Address Book screen button Select the address book entry to delete Press the Delete screen button to delete the address book entry A confirmation pop up will display Select Ok to delete select Cancel to cancel the operation To delete the entire address book f 2 3 4 Select the CONFIG hard key Select the NAV screen button Select the Edit View Address Book screen button A list of all the address book entries will display Press and hold the Clear All screen button A confirmation pop up will display Select Ok to delete select Cancel to cancel the operation Map Database Information Disc Coverage Area ea
49. operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and comply with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Tire Pressure Monitor Operation If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a messag
50. rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department
51. receiver may have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message will alternate with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there may be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receiver If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver may have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer CD Player The player can be used for CD MP3 DVD audio and as a DVD video player See DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information about DVD audio and video Six Disc CD Player While playing a CD the navigation system is available When you insert a CD the CD tab displays If a DSP setting is selected for the CD it activates each time you play a CD If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number displays If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section If viewing a map screen touch the CD screen button The display will spl
52. reservoir is filled with DOT 3 DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the reservoir 6 36 There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down e The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up e A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light comes on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir Se
53. room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 5 4 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce
54. the vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill consider How steep is the downhill Will be able to maintain vehicle control What is the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery Hard packed dirt Gravel Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts Logs Boulders Things not to do when driving down a hill e When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across The vehicle could roll over Never go downhill with the transmission in N Neutral called free wheeling The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill e What is at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden pas but if it happens when going downhill creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks If you decide you can go down a hill safely try to keep the 1 Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and vehicle headed straight down Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping the vehicle under control at all times A CAUTION Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This could cause loss of control and a serious a
55. to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over e Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression the vehicle can tilt even more For these reasons carefully consider whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping The best way to prevent this is to walk the course first so you Know what the surface is like before driving it Stalling on an Incline A CAUTION Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline be sure you and any passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you will be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it do
56. unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on 3 35 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for more information The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt 3 36 Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible malfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 79 The airbag
57. vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 78 7 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 8 Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare tire 9 Tighten each wheel nut by hand Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub 10 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle Lower the jack completely 6 87 A CAUTION Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 6 113 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities
58. whenever possible Use the navigation system to e Plan a route e Select a destination using various methods and choices e Follow turn by turn route and map guidance with voice prompts only if permitted by traffic laws controls and conditions You should always be alert and obey traffic and roadway laws and instructions regardless of the guidance from the navigation system Because the navigation system uses street map information that does not include all traffic restrictions or the latest road changes it may suggest using a road that is now closed for construction or a turn that is prohibited by signs at the intersection Because the system uses limited information you must always evaluate whether following the system s directions is safe and legal for the current conditions 4 5 When the navigation system is turned on a screen may appear with the information below and you must read and acknowledge the information it contains A CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others To help avoid a crash in which you or others could be killed e Always concentrate on your driving first by keeping your eyes and mind on the road and your hands on the wheel e Follow system directions only if permitted by traffic laws controls and conditions e Before using this system read the owner manual and learn how it operates e Some sys
59. 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward automatically Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following A CAUTION 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 3 Make sure the safety belt in the center seating position is not caught between the two seats and is not twisted Folding
60. 2 Select the desired preset destination screen button The screen buttons are labeled with the name that was selected for the destination when it was stored The map screen with the destination marked displays 3 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 4 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information Map Destination Screen Functions If the map screen is used to show destination it will have map screen capabilities such as Go Mark Zoom Scroll etc The address is shown at the top of the screen Destination Map Screen OnStar Destination Download OnStar Destination Download if equipped is a service available for OnStar subscribers that makes operating your navigation system much simpler It allows subscribers to request and receive navigation assistance on the go 4 35 Using OnStar Destination Download Press the blue OnStar button and an Advisor can locate a point of interest or an address and download the necessary information or coordinates to your navigation system Once the destination is downloaded the navigation system will search for the address in the mapping disc s database When the address is found it will be shown on your navigation system s screen along with the buttons described below 2829 W 14 MILE RD
61. 3 35 Trip Qdomete wc esntenceecsiccttetneenaeesnentenenses 3 35 Garage Door Opener ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 55 Garment HOOKS iiipin teens bec ekuencae 2 63 Gasoline Octane cca eect entcen cess a A 6 5 Specifications cicccscvecsiccnnevesenslesnnntenderderienncbncnns 6 6 Getting Started Navigation ceeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 4 Global Positioning System GPS ceeeee 4 59 Glove BOX sic cenaiern isiethaiiie ne Ate 2 62 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 00 8 7 Hazard Warning FlasherS c seeeeeeeeeneeeee eee 3 6 Head Restraints accicieacavessdceaetecstcndebascnaueesaaciaeeed 1 2 Headlamps AMINO eei E A N 6 48 Bulb Replacement ceisir sieisen ninn 6 51 Daytime Running Lamps DRL ccecce 3 21 Exterior Lamps lt i 2 cccsithens iisa oner na 3 16 FIASHAO PASS erir stderd sw itanate iiaeaae 3 9 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 6 51 High Low Beam Changer c eee 3 8 On Reminder c cecceeeeeeeeeeeee een eeneeaeenes 3 21 Heated Steering Wheel cceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeees 3 6 Heated Seats assisen isein edre een 1 5 1 6 Heater Engine Coolant isisisi eneas ranna 2 28 Highbeam On Light sirnsiiesnasiiicn minnie neinn 3 46 High Speed Operation Tires cseeeeeeeeeeneeee 6 63 Highway AYpnOSiS 2 scseesldnodo i 5 27 Hill and Mountain Roads n 5 28 Hood Checking Things Under ceeeeeeeeee eee 6 12 FGICA
62. 4 Continue holding the switch up for approximately two seconds after the window is completely closed The window is now reprogrammed Repeat the process for the other windows 2 20 Window Lockout fas Window Lockout The rear window lockout button is located on the driver door near the window switches Press the right side of the button to disable the rear window controls The light on the button will illuminate indicating the feature is in use The rear windows still can be raised or lowered using the driver window switches when the lockout feature is active To restore power to the rear windows press the button again The light on the button will go out Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare Detach the sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side to cover the driver or passenger side of the front window Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window It can be moved along the rod from side to side in this position also Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the driver s and passenger s sun visors Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle has a content theft deterrent ala
63. 7 13 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for reservoir location Notice e When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint 6 35 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder
64. Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this Automatic Transmission Operation When parked on a hill especially when the vehicle has a heavy load you may notice an increase in the effort to If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode shift out of P Park See Torque Lock Automatic Hybrid manual for more information Transmission under Shifting Into Park on page 2 36 for more information The electronic shift position indicator displays A CAUTION when the shift lever is moved out of P Park There are several different positions for the shift lever It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll The vehicle has a Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic transmission and has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster Do not le
65. Blocks E Jack D gt Tool Bag with F Wing Nut Retaining Jack Tools Wheel Blocks Retaining Bracket G Jack Knob Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag 1 Return the tools wheel wrench jack handle and jack handle extensions to the tool bag B 2 Assemble wheel blocks A and jack E together with the wing nut F UO Position the jack E and wheel blocks A in the driver s side trim panel over the wheelhouse Turn the jack knob G clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket Use the retaining bracket C to fasten the tool bag B on the stud and turn the wing nut D clockwise to secure Regular Wheelbase shown Extended Wheelbase similar 6 Return the storage tray to its original stored position 6 95 Spare Tire Your vehicle when new had a fully inflated spare tire A spare tire may lose air over time so check its inflation pressure regularly See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle For instruction on how to remove install or store a spare tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6 84 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 92 After installing the spare tire on your vehicle you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
66. Categories The following are traffic condition categories and symbols that can appear on the display Category 1 Road Closure Road Closed Road and or ramps closed Category 2 Traffic Delayed Stopped Traffic Traffic stopped stop and go traffic delayed and congested traffic Category 3 Incidents Alert Object in the roadway disabled vehicle or dangerous road conditions Es Accident Roadway obstructed due to accident Road Works Delayed traffic due to construction Category 4 Advisories a gt Road Condition Delayed or stopped traffic lane blocked or closed due to a road condition Weather Heavy rain snow or fog weather condition P Parking Available parking area Information Special event general information or warning 4 55 Detailed Traffic Event Screens Traffic Event On Route In 11 5 Mile s Length 6 5 Mile s Road Construction M 14 Beck Rad Road Construction 24 hours a day Lane Reductions in effect for all Lane Reductions in effect for all Traffic Event Screen The detailed Traffic Event screens are used to display additional details of a traffic event condition This screen may display if e Scrolling to an event on the map and then pressing INFO e Selecting a traffic event listed on the Traffic Event List screen The Traffic Event screen may display when approaching a traffic event 4 56 B
67. If a disc is inserted into the DVD compartment slot and it exceeds the Parental Setting the following message appears on display The Parental Setting of this player prohibits play Would you like to allow this disc to play If yes if selected the six digit password must be entered for the disc to play If the wrong password is entered the following message appears This movie will not play due to the Parental Setting of the player To create a six digit password use the numeric keypad on the remote control Press the ENTER button to confirm The default password is 136900 To change the Parental Control Password 1 Press the SETUP button on the remote control 2 Navigate to the Password sub menu under the Password Setup Page 3 Press the right navigation arrow then press ENTER 4 At the Old Password option enter the old password or the default password 136900 5 At the New Password option enter the new password six digits using numeric buttons 6 At the Confirm PWD option confirm the new password by entering the new password again 7 Scroll to the OK button and press ENTER The message Your password has been changed displays ip wi Password Setup Page Change Password Old Password New Password Confirm PWD 3 109 Playing Audio CD When an audio CD is playing the display shows the current track and the amount of
68. If the vehicle has a third row the lap shoulder belts have either free falling or cinching latch plates Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate style Cinching Latch Plate 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions Free Falling Latch Plate will show you how 1 72 For third row seating positions with cinching latch 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks plates tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed Position the release button on the buckle co that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 73 4 For passenger seating positions with a lap shoulder belt and a free falling latch plate pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock When installing a child restraint using a lap shoulder belt and a cinching latch plate skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5 1 74 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child re
69. Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving under Off Road Driving on page 5 13 Add On Equipment When you carry removable items you may need to put a limit on how many people you can carry inside your vehicle Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR of the front or rear axle Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension comes as a part of the Road Sensing Suspension See Road Sensing Suspension on page 5 9 This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height 5 39 The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned to LOCK You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a weight distributing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the height See We
70. Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 65 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 113 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 78 Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 92 6 70 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators You need new tires if any of the following statements are true e You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire e You can see cord or fabr
71. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated To program up to three devices 1 From inside the vehicle press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds and immediately release them Locate in the garage the garage door opener receiver motor head unit Locate the Learn or Smart button It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit and may be a colored button Press this button After pressing this button complete the following steps in less than 30 seconds Immediately return to the vehicle Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 20 seconds 4 Immediately within one second release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete 5 Press and release the same button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home automat
72. Select the On Route touch screen button to display all events ahead on the current active route If no traffic events have been reported on route No Traffic Events Reported On route displays FM 104 3 pa Full Map Traffic 4 No Traffic Events Reported On Route Name Select the Name touch screen button to display traffic events in the order of distance The closest event is shown first 4 54 Refresh Select the Refresh touch screen button to update the screen with all of the latest traffic events miles etc Traffic events update approximately every two minutes To update the events immediately press the Refresh touch screen button Scrolling to Traffic Events on the Map METS While scrolling the map traffic condition icons may appear Traffic events may appear up to 75 mi 125 km from your current position To receive information about the traffic condition place the cross hairs over the traffic condition icon After selecting the INFO information screen button the type of traffic condition the street name anda description of the traffic condition displays See Scrolling the Map under Maps on page 4 15 for more information To display traffic events in another state or a great distance away scroll to the desired area and then stop scrolling Wait for the traffic to update It may take up to two minutes before traffic in this new area can be received and displayed Traffic Event Display
73. Ss 4 Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash 1 35 Q What is wrong with this on A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way 1 36 Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs 1 37 Q What is wrong with th
74. The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 1 51 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts 1 52 The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 43 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length of trip If yes continue If no return to the booster seat If you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Q What is the proper way to wear safet
75. The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 73 6 57 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried a
76. UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 73 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Inflation Tire Pressure If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following e Too much flexing e Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling e Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over infla
77. Warnings and Messages ceceeeeeeeenn 3 56 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview cccccccece 2 40 Manual Rearview sreressrsicndoini ier eiesiienes 2 40 Outside Convex Mirror ssssssssssisrereserrrrsrerne 2 41 Mirrors cont Outside Heated Mirrors ceeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 42 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 000 2 40 Park Wilt esse senn atest cenedise Drea tnietars Steg 2 41 Navigation Getting Started cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 4 4 System Overview ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Using the System si micineiiaei naire moni iian 4 13 Navigation System Privacy eseeeeceeeeceeeeeee 8 18 New Vehicle Break In eeeeeseceeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Object Detection Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA mirman tainted ornini a aa ai aeia 2 44 Odometer eisiinoeraren ursina nan EAEE EEE 3 35 p e AE E E E E S 3 35 Of ROAT oeaan a a n OESE De 5 13 PPIVIAG sotsies attic sii neient e na EE E aden 5 13 RECOVETY insist irets paa aa E a Sean 5 11 Oil ENGINE oyrot n A 6 15 Engine Oil Life System eeeeeeeeee e 6 18 Pressure Light essiri ner ishidan siei 3 44 10 Older Children Restraints ccccceeeeeeeeee 1 52 Online Owner Center ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 8 5 OnStar Privacy seciciwsescc svdeesesetecsacsasvereestavews 8 18 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 52 Operation Universal Home Remote System 2 55 Ordering Map
78. When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 1 84 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 81 Airbags Passenger Status Indicator 0 0ee 3 37 Readiness Light ccc cicet sncweanseastacn ores aennesd ote 3 36 System Gheck scrire aiii ia erta i ais 1 79 All Wheel Drive cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 45 All Wheel Drive AWD System o 5 9 Analog GlOCK i s0iccc ech siesta a 3 26 Antenna Rear Side Window ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 117 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SYSE M mennaan E de ae E EO 3 117 Antilock Brake System ABS aace 5 5 Warning Hight ci cstcstuacccspinactassancecene adeeaarerinens 3 40 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 6 102 Care of Safety Belts ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 100 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeee ees 6 104 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 6 101 Fabric Carpet esciccd cdenetsdeaeetdasanhocteaattasta sant 6 98 Finish Gare iiion EEE EEE 6 101 Finish Damage errs enice e lettiens 6 103 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACES A 6 99 Interior Cleaning seseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereerenne 6 96 L ather consomp nani nae E E A 6 98 Sheet Metal Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 103 Speaker COVES cn sccscanieencsed sa cectvessaneatehecbeens 6 100 TNES gut cassis dies wiGhearunssee E T E O EA 6 103 Underbody Maintenance 6 104 Washing Your Veh
79. Your Air Q A 1 94 bag Equipped Vehicle Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly Yes If you add things that change the vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric P could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 8
80. a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eli
81. and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat Lift the lever s located on the bottom rear of the second row seat s on the inboard side to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward automatically Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in P Park for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure t
82. and debris Do not add any label to a CD or DVD it could get caught in the player If a CD or DVD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD or DVD with a soft marker Auxiliary Devices The vehicle may have a rear entertainment system RSE with a second and third row screen The RSE has audio adapters to allow you to connect auxiliary devices The audio can be heard through the speakers or through the wireless or wired headphones See Audio Video Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Overhead on page 3 87 or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Headrest DVD on page 3 97 for more information Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 5 2 for more information on driver distraction To switch the RSE system to use an auxiliary device 1 Connect the auxiliary device to the RSE system for the second or third row 2 Press the AUDIO key then press the AUDIO key repeatedly until AUX auxiliary is selected or touch the AUX screen button An auxiliary device must be connected for the AUX screen button to appear as an option to select 4 85 3 For the second row display select the Rear AUX Voice recognition can be used when the ignition is on screen button next to Rear Display 1 and for the or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active third row display select
83. and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranties in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait
84. and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes 3 17 IntelliBeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System For vehicles with this feature be sure to read this entire section before using it IntelliBeam is an enhancement to the vehicle s headlamp system Using a digital light sensor on the rearview mirror this system will turn the vehicle s high beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions The IntelliBeam system turns the high beam headlamps on when it is dark enough there is no other traffic present and the IntelliBeam system is enabled Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam Press and release the IntelliBeam button on the inside rear view mirror The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror will turn on to let you know the system has been turned on Once the system has been turned on it will remain on each time the vehicle is started Additionally the IntelliBeam system must be enabled To enable the IntelliBeam system turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO with the turn signal multifunction lever in its neutral position The High Beam On Light will appear on the instrument panel cluster when the high beams are on See Highbeam On Light on page 3 46 3 18 Driving with IntelliBeam IntelliBeam will only activate your high beams when driving over 20 mph 32 km h The high beam headlamps will remain on under
85. as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 52 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manu
86. available slot and start playing The system will display the type of disc inserted To load multiple discs do the following 1 Press and hold the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it in Once a disc is loaded the system will display Insert Disc number again Load the next disc Repeat this procedure for each disc The player takes up to six discs do not try to load more than six The system will not display the disc types when loading all until the discs have been read by the system Once all discs have been inserted the system will start playing the last loaded disc 4 75 A Eject To eject a disc do the following 1 Press the eject hard key 2 The system will display Ejecting Disc Press the DISC screen button to display the Disc Changer screen Select the disc to eject If a selection is not made the system will eject the disc from the current slot If the disc is not removed from the slot the system will pull it back in after 10 seconds and start playing it To eject all discs at once press and hold the eject hard key The system will display the disc number being ejected aM Mm 5 i Random DISC 4 76 Il gt Pause Play Touch this button to pause the CD This button will then change to the play button Touch the
87. be recalled when using the transmitter labeled 1 if enabled through the DIC See Memory Features on page 1 7 and DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to the vehicle Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC See REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for additional information Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch located above the metal base Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object
88. clock position If this clears the message s the vehicle does not need servicing If this does not clear the message s then turn the vehicle off wait 15 seconds and then turn it back on again to reset the system If any of these messages still appear on the Driver Information Center DIC the vehicle should be taken in for service For more information on the DIC messages see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 A ee The StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated The system may be heard or felt while it is working this is normal The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls V eQ The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both systems traction control and StabiliTrak were previously on To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak press and hold the button for five seconds Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut off for any other reason When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver The vehicle will still have brake traction control when traction control is off but will not be able to use the engine speed
89. dry place Remote Control To use the remote control aim at the remote sensor located on top center of the video display screen and press the desired button Objects blocking the line of sight can affect the function of the remote control Direct or very bright light can affect the ability of the transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement following this section The remote control provided with the Headrest DVD RSE system is not a universal remote control and will not control other equipment Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place 3 101 Remote Control Buttons SETUP Press to change the default settings see Using the RSE On Screen Display OSD Menus later in this manual There are four main menu screens each screen displays a menu to select different setting options The screens are z iy i OQO 000 aae 1000 OIRO 1 General Setup adjusts screen settings Audio Setup sets the language 3 Preference Screen sets the subtitles and parental controls 4 Password Setup allows a password to be set EKO 9005 Z Ze H i Press SETUP again
90. engine is running at high speed 2 30 Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are e Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down e Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down By doing this the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power D Drive can be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving You may want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 5 12 M Manual Mode This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions See Driver Shift Control DSC later in this section Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use
91. engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 40 Along with ABS the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning DRP system If there is a DRP problem both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10 second chime The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired See your dealer retailer for service Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there w
92. extra warning not to change lanes SBZA displays do not come on while the vehicle is approaching or passing other vehicles At speeds greater then 20 mph 32 km h SBZA displays may come on when a vehicle you have passed remains in or drops back into the detection zone 2 46 SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information Center DIC See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 for more information If the SBZA is disabled by the driver the SBZA mirror displays will not light up during normal driving When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions The system does not need to be serviced due to an occasional missed alert The number of missed alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is on and vehicles are in the blind zone the system may need service Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer SBZA is designed to ignore stationary objects however the system may occasionally light up due to guard rails signs trees shrubs and other stationary objects This is normal system operation the vehicle does not need service SBZA does not operate when the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud dirt snow ice slush or in heavy rainstorms For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 If the DIC still dis
93. facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a CAUTION Continued 1 76 CAUTION Continued forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or for how and where to install the child restraint using around the restraint The child restraint instructions LATCH If a child restraint
94. fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly 1 50 Lap Belt This part is only for the lap belt To learn how to wear a lap shoulder belt see Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 43 You vehicle may have a center seating position When you sit in the center front seating position you have a lap safety belt which has no retractor To make the belt longer tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt Buckle position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt To make the belt shorter pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 51 Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the correct buckle Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit
95. flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain 3 67 To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will rema
96. for a period of time e Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 37 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children including children in child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 for more information including important safety information 1 89 If the On Indicator i
97. from the tumbled position by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle at the bottom rear of the seat 4 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor 5 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 27 Removing the Third Row Seat Installing the Third Row Seat To remove the seat do the following To install the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 1 Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle 2 Fold the seatback forward using the instructions 2 Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on listed under Folding the Seatbacks previously the floor and roll the seat forward The front latches The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is should lock into place If the latches do not lock try folded tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly 3 Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the 3 Unlatch the seat from seat to engage the rear floor latches the floor by pulling the carrying handle located at the rear of the seat rearward AN CAUTION A seat
98. full deployment occurs Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver s seat The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment Your vehicle has roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 79 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over or in a severe frontal impact In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airb
99. generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on the brake system warning light comes on when the parking brake is set If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged a chime sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h The vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop the vehicle For good braking both parts need to be working well If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem Have the brake system inspected by your dealer retailer This light can also come on due to low brake fluid See Brakes on page 6 36 for more information Canada BRAKE United States This light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned to ON RUN If it does not have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully The pedal could be harder to push or could go closer to the floor It can take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 40 A CAUTION The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning lig
100. have to be replaced to correct the problem This would not be covered by the warranty For more information if the GPS is not functioning properly see f the System Needs Service on page 4 61 and Problems with Route Guidance on page 4 61 4 59 Vehicle Positioning At times the position of the vehicle on the map may be inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons Road system has changed Vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such as in sand gravel and or snow Vehicle is traveling on winding roads Vehicle is on a long straight road Vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large vehicle Surface streets run parallel to a freeway Vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle carrier or a ferry Current position calibration is set incorrectly Vehicle is traveling at high speed 4 60 Vehicle changes directions more than once or when the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot Vehicle is entering and or exiting a parking lot ora garage GPS signal is not received Roof carrier is installed on the vehicle Vehicle is being driven with tire chains Tires are replaced Tire pressure for the tires is incorrect Tires are worn First time the map DVD is inserted Battery is disconnected for several days Vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at low speeds and the vehicle is stopped and started repeatedly See your dealer retailer if other problems occur
101. high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Battery Run Down Protection This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK OFF This helps to prevent the battery from running down Accessory Power Oultlet s The accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone The vehicle has three accessory power outlets They are located inside the floor console storage bin
102. if the headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam the high beam headlamps will turn on They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps the low beam headlamps must be on for the flash to pass feature to work Windshield Wipers Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers W Mist Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers stop after one wipe Hold the band on mist longer for more wipe cycles O Off Turns the wipers off Delay Turn the band to adjust the delay time The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever This can be very useful in light rain or snow GB Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed High Speed For high speed wiping Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well making it harder to see and drive safely If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts For more information see Windshield
103. information 4 A caution may appear Touch the OK screen button to proceed 5 Press the DEST hard key 10 11 Press the Point of Interest screen button Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province Enter the specific title of the POI in the POI name space e g Washington Monument If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This button represents the number of available POls Select this button to view the list Select the Go screen button next to the POI A map screen with the destination marked appears Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Point of Interest POI under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Storing Preset Destinations 1 If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted skip to Step 5 2 Press D to turn the system on 3 Insert the DVD map disc See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more information A caution may appear Touch the OK screen button to proceed Press the DEST hard key Enter a destination See Destination on page 4 25 for m
104. information about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Example 3 Item Description Vehicle Capacity A Weight for Gaa Example 3 g Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs ese 91 kg x 5 g Available Cargo 0 Ibs 0 kg 5 37 Certification Tire Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR COLD TIRE PRESSURE Drd Cc SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your vehicle s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 5 38 To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center line Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle And if you do have a heavy load you should spread it out A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
105. is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than three gallons 11 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles 11 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 6 9 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle s fuel system Do not add anything to E85 Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fi
106. is secured using a safety belt will show you how and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 37 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 77 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 78 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tig
107. it will not affect vehicle handling 6 72 A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 64 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic syst
108. key if the alarm has been set off To avoid setting off the alarm by accident e If you do not want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if it is armed If you set off the alarm by accident press unlock on the RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn it to START to turn off the alarm The alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way 2 21 Testing the Alarm To test the alarm 1 From inside the vehicle lower the drivers window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the RKE transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the security light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm While the alarm is set the power door unlock switch will not work If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 106 If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer retailer 2 22 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immo
109. lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can 6 106 Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel Pull off the cover to access the fuse block The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown Rear Accessory Power Outlet Steering Wheel Controls Backlight Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps Driver Side Turn Signal 6 Driver Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Instrument Panel Back Lighting Passenger Side Turn Signal Stoplamp Passenger Door Module Driver Unlock Power Door Lock 2 Unlock Feature Power Door Lock 2 Lock Feature Stoplamp 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Power Liftgate 6 107 Fuses Usage Power Door Lock 1 Lock Feature Driver Information Center DIC Keyless Entry System Unlock Feature Circuit Breaker Usa Driver Side Power Window Circuit LT DR Breaker Harness Connector LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection BODY BODY 6 108 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Top View HEADLINER HEADLINER HEADLINER 1 SEO UPFITTER Harness Connector BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 Harness Connector HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Conn
110. material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 1 91 Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature will be engaged This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not u
111. missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low 3 76 Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 115 for more information Eg Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition cx V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or to cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a
112. more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbony MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 104 If the vehicle has the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 6 5 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 5 Only vehicles that have the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 can use 85 ethanol
113. network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand held Radio Frequency RF transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers security systems and home lighting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Universal Home Remote System Operation With Three Round LED
114. not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage the top tether be attached attach and tighten the these parts If necessary move buckled safety top tether to the top tether anchor if the vehicle has belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments one Refer to the child restraint instructions and Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt the following steps buckled This could damage the safety belt or 2 1 Find the top tether anchor the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its 2 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether stowed position before folding the seat according to your child restrain
115. numbers located on the lower left side of the remote control can be used to enter numbered menu options channels or track numbers GOTO Press to enter the GOTO menu to choose a desired title chapter track or song inside the disc DISPLAY Press to scroll through display information on the upper left corner of the screen such as title chapter track time elapsed and time remaining or to turn off the display PROGRAM Press to edit a playback program containing desired titles in the DVD or tracks in the CD DA 3D Press to change between different 3D audio modes for DVD or CD The options for DVD are Off Rock Pop Live Dance Techno Classic and Soft 3 104 The options for CD are Off Concert Living room Hall Bathroom Cave Arena and Church RANDOM Press to play titles randomly PLAY PAUSE II Press to start playback of the disc or to pause playback STOP Ml Press to stop playback of a disc e To resume disc playback press PLAY e To start playback from the beginning of the disc press STOP STOP then PLAY ZOOM Press to either enlarge the viewed image by 2X 3X and 4X or reduce the image by 1 2X 1 3X and 1 4X PBC Playback Control Press to turn video CD playback control on or off FR M Fast Reverse Press to fast reverse the disc Press multiple times to choose between 2X 4X 8X 16X and 32X speeds FF gt Fast Forward Press to fast forward the disc Press multiple time
116. of the heavy duty trailer wiring package These provisions are for an electric brake controller The red black stripe power feed will not be connected to the battery until the ring terminal is unstowed and connected to the underhood electrical center The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller The harness contains the following wires e Dark Blue Auxiliary e Red Black Battery e Light Blue White Brake Switch e White Ground The trailer brake controller should be installed by your dealer retailer or a qualified service center Trailer Recommendations Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating CWR CWR is the maximum weight of the load the vehicle can carry It does not include the weight of the people inside but you can figure about 150 Ibs 68 kg for each passenger The total cargo load must not be more than the vehicles CWR Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached so the GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded If using a weight distributing hitch weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading out the weight of the load and choosing the correct hitch and trailer brakes For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 5 57 42 NOTES 5 58 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE siara haya a E ai 6 3 Accessories and Modifications cee 6 3 C
117. on page 3 65 for more information Outside Convex Mirror A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat 2 44 Outside Heated Mirrors Gi Rear Window Defogger Press to heat the mirrors See Rear Window Defogger under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 27 for more information Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system it operates at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R Reverse The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet 2 5 m behind the vehicle and at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground 2 42 A CAUTION The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system does not replace driver vision It cannot detect e objects that are below the bumper underneath the vehicle or if they are too close or far from the vehicle e children pedestrians bicyclists or pets If you do not use proper care before and while backing vehicle damage injury or death
118. on the map screen This function allows which traffic information displays 4 52 Show Traffic ICONs F ay Closed Road hd kom AOD P Li Advisories Traffic Delays Incidents Traffic Flow Status This touch screen button is used to enable or disable the green yellow red and orange arrows shown beside the roads and used to show the traffic flow or extent of a traffic event e Black indicates a closed road segment e Red indicates significantly impaired traffic flow with average speed of less than 25 mph e Yellow indicates slightly impaired traffic flow with average speed between 25 and 45 mph e Green indicates normal traffic flow with average speed above 45 mph e Orange indicates construction Traffic flow data arrows display on the map when scaled up to eight miles Closed Road Traffic Delays Incidents and Advisories These four touch screen buttons are used to select the traffic event ICONS that appear on the map screens Alert for Approaching Traffic Events When On if an approaching traffic event is within the alert range one of two traffic alert pop up screens display e With no route planned while on expressways Approaching Traffic Event without Avoid screen displays e With route planned Traffic Event on Route screen displays If the Alert for Approaching Traffic Events is Off the alert pop up screen does not display 4 53 On Route
119. or right seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu Hold the left or right bl seek arrow to perform a cursor left or right on the menu PROG Program Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer press this button to select the next disc if multiple discs are loaded This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press the PROG button to perform the menu function enter Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel A Next Press to go to the next radio station stored as a favorite or the next track if a CD DVD is playing V G Previous En
120. out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area Therefore a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading 6 46 How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface e For Two Wheel Drive vehicles the proper level is from 0 6 inch to 1 6 inches 15 mm to 40 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level e For All Wheel Drive vehicles the proper level is from 0 04 inch to 0 75 inch 1 0 mm to 19 0 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the rear axle Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface A Fill Plug B Drain Plug e When the differential is cold add enough lubric
121. readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for important safety information The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG amp OFF ON 2 M SA United States Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag 3
122. recalibration amp Customization Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Odometer Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km To switch between English and metric measurements see Units later in this section Trip Odometer Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed Fuel Range Press the trip fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in tra
123. scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop 6 103 Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first
124. seat controls memory buttons power mirror buttons power tilt wheel control or adjustable pedal switch If something has blocked the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position the driver s seat and or the adjustable pedals recall may stop working If this happens remove the obstruction and press the appropriate function control for two seconds Then try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button If the memory position is still not recalling see your dealer retailer for service Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver s door between buttons 1 and 2 With the vehicle in P Park the exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button You will hear a single beep The driver s seat will move back If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver Information Center DIC automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition See EASY EXIT SEAT under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information Further programming for the memory seat feature can be done using the DIC You can select the automatic easy exit seat feature or the remote memory seat recall feature For programming information see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 1 8 Power Reclining Seatbacks Driver s Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown The controls for the p
125. stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening
126. that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it 4 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor 5 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position 4 Roll the seat out of the vehicle There is a track in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle 1 28 A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 6 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 7 Make sure the safety belts are returned to the original position over the seatbacks 1 29 Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts A CAUT
127. the brakes to hold the vehicle in place The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine before making an upshift if the engine will be able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed throttle position and vehicle load If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear In some cases this may appear to be a delayed shift however the transmission is operating normally The vehicle s transmission uses adaptive shift controls that compares key shift parameters to pre programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer The transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes During this adaptive shift controls process shifting may feel different as the transmission determines the best settings When temperatures are very cold the Hydra Matic 6L80 automatic transmission s gear shifting may be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold transmission This difference in shifting is normal 2 31 Driver Shift Control DSC
128. the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 79 6 89 5 If the spare does not lower turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends with the backs facing each other 7 Place the bottom edge of the jack A on the wheel blocks B separating them so that the jack is balanced securely 6 90 8 Attach the jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack and place it with the wheel blocks under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper 9 10 11 12 ey Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable A CAUTION Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare 13 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
129. the OnStar Owner Guide OK Select to display the map screen Show POI Select to display or remove the POI icons from the map screen List all Categories Select to list all POls sorted alphabetically Delete To delete a specific POI category select the category Clear All Select this screen button to clear all selected POI categories Driving on a Route When driving on a routed destination the map screen automatically displays the next maneuver The pop up displays the next maneuver direction and the distance from it 4 23 Full map 12TH ST bo A Ng When approximately 1 4 mi 400 m from the next maneuver the screen displays the name and a detailed view of it 4 24 3 D Lane Guidance 1 94 E FORD FWY ___PORT HURON is gy M 10N JOHN C LODGE die aa Some major metropolitan areas may include a 3 D lane guidance feature for highway exits and junctions This feature gives you an enhanced representation of the exits and junctions on the route Cities that include this feature are New York Los Angeles Chicago Detroit and San Francisco and may also include Philadelphia Washington D C and other major highway junctions Dual Mode This dual screen symbol displays when the screen is in dual mode Dual mode displays the route on half of the screen and a maneuver or Interstate Exit list on the other half The Interstate Exit list advises of approaching exits Press t
130. the Rear AUX screen See Retained Accessory Power RAP in the Index button next to Rear Display 2 Each screen of your vehicle s owner manual for more information works independently of the other The second row screen can watch a DVD while the third row screen can use the auxiliary device To use voice recognition do the following 1 Push and hold the SRCE button on the steering wheel until you hear a beep The audio system mutes The rear seat passengers can also use the remote control to change the functions of the RSE See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Overhead on page 3 87 or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Headrest DVD on page 3 97 for more information Voice Recognition The navigation system s voice recognition allows for hands free operation of the navigation system audio system and OnStar features The DVD map disc must be installed in the navigation system for voice recognition to work See Installing the DVD Map Disc under Maps on page 4 15 for more information 2 Clearly state one of the commands listed on the following pages 4 86 Helpful Hints for Stating Commands e When a multiple command is available choose the command that works best e Words that are in brackets are optional For example for the command Radio band select FM stating Radio FM or Radio select FM are both valid commands e When the system recognizes the command the system does one of the fo
131. the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed Battery If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for battery location Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 6 39 Vehicle Storage A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 6 40 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Sto
132. the cover forward until the lower tabs line up with the lower fascia slots 3 Snap the hitch cover into place by pushing the upper corners forward 4 Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees clockwise to lock the cover in place Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer If the trailer being towed weighs up to the vehicle s trailer rating limit safety chains may be attached to the attaching point on the hitch platform Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Tow Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow haul mode This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow haul mode is on Tow Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 for more information Tow Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle s Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR See Weight of the Trailer later in the section Tow Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions e W
133. the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE tra
134. the latest information at the time it was printed GM reserves the right to make changes after that time without notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division wherever it appears in this manual This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and words work together to explain vehicle operation Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 15911387 B Second Printing Canadian Owners Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais aupr s du concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue frangaise www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A b
135. the play button to play the DVD Touch this button in a DVD disc main menu to start the movie E Stop Touch this button to stop play of the DVD Press the play button to continue playing the DVD from where the DVD was stopped Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD DISC Touch this screen button to view the list of loaded disc s Select the disc to play U Rewind Touch and release this button to rewind through the scene chapters and titles Touch this button again to increase the rewinding speed Touch the play button to stop rewinding This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews ad Forward Touch and release this button to advance rapidly through the scene chapters and titles Touch this button again to increase the fast forwarding speed Touch the play button to stop fast forwarding This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Audio Se Subtitle Angle DISC Setup Seach Hide Options Press this screen button to remove all menu options from the display except Options and Cursor Top Menu Touch this button to display the first menu of the DVD This is not available on all DVDs Menu Touch this button to display the DVD menu of the current area of the DVD that is playing This button is not available for DVD audio Audio Press this button to display the audio options Se
136. the remaining route to your destination Installing the DVD Map Disc When a DVD Map Disc is installed noise from the disc may occur this is normal system operation The navigation system in this vehicle uses a DVD to store map information When the system loads data from the disc you may hear a very slight buzz sound from the navigation system The sound is similar to that of a CD player seeking through different tracks This is normal operation and may occur more frequently with the use of XM NavTraffic Your dealer retailer may have installed the map DVD If the map DVD was not installed do the following to load it 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press the power knob to turn the navigation system on or press the NAV DEST or MENU hard keys If the MENU hard key is selected press and hold until the NAV screen is active or select the NAV tab manually 3 Load the map DVD partway into the slot located just below the screen The system will pull it in 4 Touch the OK screen button to agree to the Caution screen if it appears If the map is in split screen mode you must push the NAV tab button to get the full map screen DVD Map Disc Messages If Disc Read Error appears on the display and or the map disc comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e If the map disc was installed into the CD slot See Installing the DVD Map Disc previously e It is very hot when the temperature returns to nor
137. the risk of danger while passing e Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait e Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane e Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility e Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle e When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger 5 12 Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin Remember Any tr
138. the spare is correctly inflated The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 70 mph 112 km h at the recommended inflation pressure so you can finish your trip Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto your vehicle This way a spare tire will be available in case you need it again Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes because they will not fit Keep your spare tire and its wheel together 6 96 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleane
139. throttle and brake pedal feature if your vehicle has it 3 To save your positions in memory do the following 1 Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar both outside mirrors steering wheel and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2 40 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2 27 for more information Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall the mirror positions 2 Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know that the position has been stored A second seating mirror steering wheel position and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 To recall the memory positions the vehicle must be in P Park Press and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position The seat outside mirrors steering wheel position and adjustable throttle and brake pedals will move to the position previously stored You will hear a single beep If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on automatic seat mirror steering wheel position and adjustable pedal movement will occur See MEMORY SEAT RECALL under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time press one of the power
140. to determine the latch plate style Cinching Latch Plate The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a free falling latch plate is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again Free Falling Latch Plate 1 43 Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the right front seating position may affect the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for more information 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle see if you are using the correct buckle Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle for If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt lap shoulder belts with cinching latch plates tilt the Extender on page 1 51 latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until Position the release button on the
141. to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Rear Side Window Antenna The AM FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio reception If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antenna are not damaged There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear side window antenna Repairs would not be covered by the warranty Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with sharp objects Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to the antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by the warranty XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open 3 117 42 N
142. too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning indicator flash three times and then turn off indicating the air conditioning mode is not available If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air so a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal 3 30 lt amp Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the recirculation is on This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor defog or defrost modes If recirculation is selected with one of those modes the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp To clear the fog select either the
143. up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 54 and Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades on page 6 102 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 95 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer tailgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge and folding seat hardware More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment App
144. vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 5 27 All Wheel Drive Vehicles Dinghy and Dolly Towing Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground All wheel drive vehicles are not designed to be towed with any wheels on the ground If the vehicle must be towed see Towing Your Vehicle previously Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Dinghy Towing To dolly tow a two wheel drive vehicle the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly See Dolly Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground following Dolly Towing Front Wheels Off the Ground Notice f atwo wheel drive vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not tow a two wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed 5 42 Notice f a two wheel drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground the transmission could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the veh
145. wait about an hour and try again e There may have been a problem while burning the DVD e The label may be caught in the DVD player If the DVD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good DVD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer 4 84 Care of Your CDs and DVDs If playing recorded media such as a CD or DVD the sound quality may be reduced due to CD or DVD quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded recording speed max media recording speed and the way the CD or DVD has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD or DVD If the surface is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched it will not play properly If the surface is soiled see Care of Your CDs and DVDs in the Index of the vehicle s owner manual If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD or DVD Notice If a label is added to a CD or DVD or more than one CD or DVD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs or DVDs the player could be damaged While using the CD or DVD player use only CDs or DVDs in good condition without any label load one CD or DVD at a time and keep the player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids
146. washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Inspect suspension and steering components See footnote b Inspect engine cooling system See footnote c Inspect wiper blades See footnote d Inspect restraint system components See footnote e Lubricate body components See footnote f Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80 000 ae 000 fea 000 ae 000 eee 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks fF oe gt Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter Severe service See footnote h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter normal service Additional Required Services cont d ni 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40 000 80000 120000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Change transfer case fluid severe service See footnotes
147. wiescetiaiacetan acachet E E dncasins 2 10 Lockout Protection cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Powel DOOP sitisciaclisietsdnoinesieneetiaheieesaeiays 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS cceeeeeeee es 2 11 Loss Of Control ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 5 12 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 63 Luggage Carrie ssrescuian eise aoaaa 2 64 Lumbar Power Controls nsii endecar n en 1 4 Magnetic Ride Control scissresiisrescanyseniiosiisies 5 9 Maintenance FOOMOLES ices ene innreise i E aA 7 8 Schedule Additional Required Services 7 6 Maintenance Schedule At Each Fuel Fill eceeceeeeeeeeeeeee eres 7 10 At Least Once a Month cceeeeeeee eres 7 10 At Least Once a Year ceccececeeceeeeeeee eres 7 11 Maintenance Record ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 Maintenance Replacement Parts 5 7 15 Maintenance Requirements eeeeeeeeee ee 7 2 Owner Checks and Services 000eee 7 10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance s 0eceeeeeeeeeeees 7 4 USING inasre tea eapentartadedtninsdand aevet aca 7 3 Your Vehicle and the Environment 7 2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 MAPS aioa a a E Ei a 4 15 Memory Features isereniss merereise 1 7 Message DIC
148. without squeezing the buttons to make sure it has locked into position 1 46 Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if the vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 96 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second row seat and the third row if the vehicle has one Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt Third Row If your vehicle has a third row remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat Second Row 1 For the second ro
149. wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest ys SAY lt N A SS i J g KK AT pea pP The belt is behind the body 1 41 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it a amp Q A The belt is twisted across the body 1 42 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position if equipped which has a lap belt See Lap Belt on page 1 50 for more information The lap shoulder belts for the first and second row seating positions are equipped with free falling latch plates If the vehicle has a third row the lap shoulder belts have either free falling or cinching latch plates Use the following pictures
150. you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you cannot control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness do not drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill decide if it is too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Consider this as you approach a hill e Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places e Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping e Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers e Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path such as boulders trees logs or ruts e What is beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you do not know It is the smart way to find out e Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion Driving Uphill Once y
151. your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example e If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall 1 84 e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts
152. 2 Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors it Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors There is one top tether anchor that can be used for either the third row center or driver side seating position but not both at the same time 1 65 For models with a three passenger third row seat see the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the third row if your vehicle has one Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor For models with 60 40 second row seating the rear right side passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion For models with second row bucket seats both rear seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion 1 66 Second Row Seat Bucket For models with bucket second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Second Row Seat 60 40 For models with 60 40 second row seating the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row Be sure to use an anchor
153. 2009 Cadillac Escalade Escalade ESV Owner Manual LJ Seats and Restraint System 000 1 1 Instrument Panel 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Head Restraints o oo eee ce cece ceca eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Instrument Panel Overview cceeeeeeeeeees 3 4 Front Seats decsiiasdeneceahonsanadoacantiwducdadeasranais 1 3 Climate Controls seerne rra anain 3 27 Rear Seals seoor 1 10 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 33 Salety BeltS cc csechccsnicddveonssawrelasadinabinnandectt 1 30 Driver Information Center DIC 3 47 Child Restraints oo ccc eeeeceee cease eee 1 52 Audio System S ooo cceceeeececeeeeeeseeeeeeea sees 3 75 Airbag System oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 1 79 Navigation System 0 eeeeeeeeeee 4 1 Restraint System Check ooo eee 1 95 OVErVIOW aeae aedi eeoa aa aaant 4 2 Features and Controls 00cccececeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 Features and Controls ascecccccerecrree 4 13 KEYS aone ma a a E 2 3 Navigation Audio System ow eee 4 62 Doors and LOCKS ooo ccecc ec ee esses ee eees 2 10 Voice Recognition oo eceececeeeeceeeeeeeaeees 4 86 WINdOWS nn 2 17 Driving Your Vehicle ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 Theft Deterrent Systems oe eee eee ee eee eee 2 21 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle _ 5 2 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 24 TONING adea ea a EN 5 40 Mirrors gt ass
154. 3 Sheet Metal Damage seeeeeeeeeeeeee eres 6 103 FINISH Damage iis nemorern aena Ea 6 103 Underbody Maintenance seeeeeee eee 6 104 Chemical Paint Spotting eceeeeeeeeee eres 6 104 Vehicle Identification eee 6 104 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 104 Service Parts Identification Label 6 105 Electrical System c cceeeeeeeeeee eee eeees 6 105 Add On Electrical Equipment 6 eeeee 6 105 Windshield Wiper Fuses ccce 6 105 Power Windows and Other Power Options 6 105 Fuses and Circuit Breakers o 6 106 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0e 6 106 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 6 108 Underhood Fuse Block c eseeeeeeeeeee ees 6 109 Capacities and Specifications 6 113 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco ig Parts EJ Goodwrench ME Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stabilit
155. 35 O o 26 O 7 O 28 O o 29 O o ferrem Headlamp 31 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 32 Driver Side High Beam Headlamp 33 Daytime Running Lamps2 Sytem That Batorent 7 38 39 O 40 A AT EEE aaa 2a Ignition System Theft Deterrent System Audio System 43 Miscellaneous Ignition Cruise Control Fuses Usage e CHMSL 53 Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet 54 Automatic Level Control Compressor Relay Climate Controls Ignition Engine Control Module Secondary Fuel Pump Ignition case Fuses Usas eo CooingFan2 6 111 J Case Fuses Usage Heated Windshield Washer System 67 Transfer Case Power Mid Bussed Electrical Center 1 Climate Control Blower Power Liftgate Module Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Stud 1 Trailer Connector Battery 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 2 6 112 Cage O FAN CNTRL HDLP LO HID FOG LAMP A C CMPRSR STRTR PWR TRN FUEL PMP PRK LAMP REAR DEFOG RUN CRANK Switched Power Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 for more information Application For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer for more information Cooling System 17 6 qt 16 7L Engine Oil with Filter 6 0 qtt 5 7 Lt
156. 37 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 for more information including important safety information 3 38 Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system A charging system message in the Driver Information Center DIC can also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information This light could indicate that there are problems with a
157. 4 13 for more information D lt 1 Power Volume Knob See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information CD DVD Video Audio Slot See CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information amp CD DVD Video Audio Eject Key See CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information Load Key See CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information AA Map DVD Slot See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for information on how to install and eject a map DVD a DVD Map Disc Eject Key See Maps on page 4 15 for more information Mark Touch Screen Button See Adding Destinations to the Address Book under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Zoom In Touch Screen Button See Map Scales under Maps on page 4 15 for more information Map Scale See Map Scales under Maps on page 4 15 for more information North Up Heading Up Symbol See Symbols on page 4 19 for more information No GPS Symbol See Symbols on page 4 19 for more information FULL MAP Touch Screen Button See NAV under Hard Keys under Using the Navigation System on page 4 13 for more information Getting Started Read this manual thoroughly to become familiar with how the navigation system operates The navigation system includes navigation and audio functions While entering the vehicle or when turning the vehicle o
158. 5 e If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 3 80 Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no e Ifthe name tag is correct say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting lt name tag gt returning to the main menu e Ifthe name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to dele
159. 7 If you have any questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 If the vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6 73 for additional important information Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt remin
160. 800 Ibs 3 538 kg You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg to avoid exceeding GVWR But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered Because the rear axle now weighs 3 100 Ibs 1 406 kg 900 Ibs 408 kg can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR The effect of tongue weight is about 1 5 times the actual weight Dividing the 900 Ibs 408 kg by 1 5 leaves only 600 Ibs 272 kg of tongue weight that can be handled Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6 000 Ibs 2 721 kg It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings GCWR GVWR RGAWR Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 for more information Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue If using a weight distributing hitch make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars Hitches It is important to have the co
161. AK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and this message displays it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system If you see this message try to reset the system Stop turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds then start the engine again If this message still comes on it means there is a problem You should see your dealer retailer for service The vehicle is safe to drive however you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak so reduce your speed and drive accordingly SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM This message displays when the Road Sensing Suspension RSS system is not operating properly Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2 23 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 41 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 65 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a p
162. BZA system If these displays remain on after continued driving the system needs service Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer 2 47 Rear Vision Camera RVC This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system Read this entire section before using it The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle When the driver shifts the vehicle into R Reverse the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen Once the driver shifts out of R Reverse the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed after a delay Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off To turn the rear vision camera system on or off 1 Shift into P Park 2 Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button 3 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Options screen will display 2 48 4 Select the Video screen button When the Video screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on The delay that is received after shifting out of R Reverse is approximately 10 seconds The delay can be cancelled by performing one of the following e Pressing a hard key on the navigation system e Shifting in to P Park e Reach a vehicle speed of 7 mph 11 km h There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
163. C 3 53 Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory Your dealer retailer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it when the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays 3 54 Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available Press the set reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See Compass Calibration Procedure following Compass Calibration The com
164. DVDS rnc e 4 61 Outlet Adjustment iiair iinan 3 31 Outlets Accessory POWET cceeeeeet eee eeeeneeeee enero es 3 25 Outside Convex Mirror c0cceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 41 Heated MIROS atecassicsehostinediatere iain 2 42 Power Foldaway Mirrors seeeeeeeeeee eee ee 2 40 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 6 33 Overview Navigation System 4 2 Owner Checks and Services 0cceceeeeee es 7 10 Owners Canadian sescscscccsscecaecacsstchdeedssecnassesen deeds iii Paint Damage 0cccceeeeecececeeeeeee ease eneees 6 103 Park Shifting INtO cece cence eects eeen eee eeneeneenes 2 36 SNIN OUTOON issenensis a n a nEn 2 37 Park Aid cccecceeceeceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeseeeeeneees 2 42 Park Tilt Mirrors ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 41 Parking ASSISE poera seen 2 42 Brake 2 2orcsnenjecths Ma satee i E ene e Ea E 2 34 Over Things That Burn iicsinseiiesii isinsi iiinis 2 38 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 37 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 87 PASSING menea a a ANS 5 12 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer OPSratlOM seni tsccends ha siennas enetik naea 2 23 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 6 4 Phone BIGStoOth airis ene n i 3 75 Power Door LOCKS sirrien a EAE 2 10 Electrical System cc2 cc
165. E system will only work with the Headrest DVD RSE system and are marked for channel 3 and 4 The wireless headphones must be used within a line of sight of the transmitter that is located above the video display screen 3 4 Channel Selector This is located on the right earpiece Either Channel 3 or 4 can be selected with the channel selector The driver side monitor is designated as Channel 3 and the passenger side as Channel 4 Set the channel selector switch according to the video display screen being viewed The message To listen to this monitor tune your headphones to Channel 3 or 4 displays for five seconds then disappears when the video display screen is turned on OFF ON Power Turn the power switch located on the earpiece to turn the wireless headphones on or off Each headphone has a light to indicate ON If the light does not come on the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement under Rear Seat Entertainment System in the vehicle s owner manual The headphones shut off automatically if the RSE system is turned off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitter for more than three minutes VOL BE Volume Use to adjust the volume on the headphones Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool
166. ECK TIRE PRESSURE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 6 56 Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 lf the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 41 DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 41 To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air
167. ENDING This message displays when the heated windshield washer system is heating the fluid See Windshield Washer on page 3 11 for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed Stop and turn off the vehicle check the hood for obstructions and close the hood again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice f you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 6 15 for more information This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check the oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer See Engine Oil on page 6 15 PARKING A
168. Enter Press to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu C Display Menu Press to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active E Stop Press to stop playing fast reversing or fast forwarding a DVD Press twice to return to the beginning of the DVD Play Pause Press to start playing a DVD Press while a DVD is playing to pause it Press again to continue playing the DVD When the DVD is playing depending on the radio perform slow play by pressing the play pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode Depending on the radio perform reverse slow play by pressing the play pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button Kd Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapter Press to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 93 A Fast Reverse Press to fast rever
169. Fuel Tank Air Conditioning Refrigerant Regular 26 0 gal 98 4L Extended 31 5 gal 119 2L Transmission Fluid Pan Removal and Replacement 5 7L Transfer Case Fluid 1 5 qt 1 4L Wheel Nut Torque 140 Ib ft 190 Nem All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid after filling tOil filter should be changed at every oil change Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap sava 0 040 in 1 01 mm 6 113 42 NOTES 6 114 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule 0 0eeeeeeee 7 2 Owner Checks and Services 0 0 0e eee es 7 10 INtFOGUGHION Ss Sondcu tania E E E 7 2 At Each Fuel Fill sc iccecicstetienscisteie tse eines actnnedes 7 10 Maintenance Requirements 0eeeeeeees 7 2 At Least Once a Month eceeeeeeee eee es 7 10 Your Vehicle and the Environment 7 2 At Least Once a Year ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Using the Maintenance Schedule 55 7 3 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance s 7 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 24 7 15 Additional Required Services eeeeeeeee ee 7 6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ccecce 7 16 Maintenance Footnotes e eceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 8 Maintenance Record 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 17 Mai
170. GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles 16 km from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own please see your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the allowance per rental day Rental reimbursement must be supp
171. ID3 tag then the radio will display the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages will be shortened The display will not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename will not display Playing an MP3 While playing a CD the navigation system is available When you insert a CD the CD tab will display If you select a DSP setting for the CD it will be activated each time you play a CD If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the player it will stay in the player When you turn on the ignition or radio the CD will start playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display 9 If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section If viewing a map screen touch the CD screen button The display will split between the audio screen and the map screen If you do not want to view a split screen or you are not on a map screen press the AUDIO key then press the AUDIO key repeatedly until CD is selected or touch the CD screen button Load To load one disc do the following 1 Press the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it into the first
172. ION Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too 1 30 A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 35 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they coul
173. KING 0 ccccecseeeseseeseeseeeseeseensens 2 10 Tow Haul MOJE ernen aE 2 33 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 14 Parking Brake ccccceceeeeseeeteeteeeeeerees 2 34 Rear Door Security LOCKS cccccceseeeseeseeeeees 2 14 Shifting Into Park s sess reiini nn 2 36 Lockout Protection ccceecccccecceeeeeeesaeeeees 2 12 Shifting Out of Park sessen 2 37 Liftgate Liftglass cts icrsshoachnlagedeyasncetanormaraahaeas 2 12 Parking Over Things That Burn 1 seeeee 2 38 Power Liftgate cccccccssesssseseeeeeeeeeneeaees 2 14 Engine Exhaust esc e enaa aeara 2 38 Power Assist Steps nseeeeeniiiieeeeeeeinnnn een 2 16 Running the Vehicle While Parked 2 39 ANT ats oh ae 2 17 MINPONS acna anenai i Eae e 2 40 Power WINdOWS cccccccceeeseseeeceeeeeeteneeeaes 2 18 Manual Rearview Mirror 0 serrereee 2 40 SUN VISOMS cs sets nedense nghan g e EER EEE 2 20 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 40 Theft Deterrent Systems 2 21 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors 2 40 Content Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeeeeneeeeee es 2 21 oe Mirror Sot part epee NAOT NEVA IVETE ce PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 Outside Heated Mirrors 2 42 PASSA a ilis Electonic Immobilizer CC TRICE NINOS se ernteaineioeas Operation cc ceeceee cece ee cece eee eea een eeneeaeenes 2 23 2 1 Section 2 Features
174. Light This light comes on when the Tow Haul mode has been activated For more information see Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 Fuel Gage When the ignition is on the fuel gage shows about how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on The gage will first indicate empty before the vehicle is out of fuel but the vehicle s fuel tank should be filled soon Here are some situations owners may experience with the fuel gage None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage e At the gas station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full e It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank e The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC displays information about your vehicle It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected The DIC also allows some features to be customized See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the center of the instrument panel cluster The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display t
175. MAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC PARK TILT MIRRORS This feature allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror s will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse See Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 2 40 for more information Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse DRIVER MIRROR The driver s outside mirror will be titted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse PASSENGER MIRROR The passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse BOTH MIRRORS The driver s and passenger s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the d
176. No U S 12346241 in Canada 10953474 Usage Fluid Lubricant Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Handle Pivot GM Part No U S 12346241 Points in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Squeaks Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Synthetic Grease with Teflon Superlube GM Part No U S 12371287 in Canada 10953437 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Maintenance Replacement Parts Wiper Blades Front 21 6 in 55 0 cm 25877402 Fo Rear 11 8 in 30 0 cm 25820122 PF O Engine Drive Belt Routing If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 7 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7 10 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Maintenance Record cont d Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Maintena
177. OTES 3 118 Section 4 Navigation System OVErVieW 02 00 ieee ecec cece ee eee c eee eee een eta een eeaeeneees 4 2 Navigation System Overview eeeeeeeeeee ees 4 2 Getting Slane 28 oain iniiae EE a 4 4 Cleaning the Display c ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 4 12 Features and Controls eee 4 13 Using the Navigation System eeeeeeeeeees 4 13 MaDS renere r scutsg a chert 4 15 SVIMDOMS enata E E 4 19 Destinati sizronisisiensiai feisan eee chews kinia 4 25 Configure Menu sss ialserii eunetan keat nnn 4 43 Global Positioning System GPS 4 59 Vehicle POSIIONIAG asc civcdteteersmeienineanemecsmenes 4 60 Problems with Route Guidance 00 4 61 If the System Needs Service eeeeeeeees 4 61 Ordering Map DVDS cceeeeeee eee eee eee eee es 4 61 Database Coverage Explanations 5 4 62 Navigation Audio System ceeeeee 4 62 CD Player E E E T 4 71 DYD Playef serucsiisonipne ioia ea 4 78 Care of Your CDs and DVDS isecccceeeeeen 4 84 Auxiliary D VICES eirririiriemenan sekon 4 85 Voice Recognition e eee 4 86 Overview Navigation System Overview Bec gt 22 Jan noona a ra a N N OP QAAZYX Screen shown with Map Disc Inserted 4 2 V WwW Source AM FM XM CD etc Touch Screen Button See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for mor
178. RY or LOCK OFF position Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal The vehicle has adjustable throttle and brake ped
179. Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in R Reverse If the engine has stopped running you need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to 5 20 P Park and restart the engine Then shift to R Reverse release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in R Reverse While backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Things not to do if the vehicle stalls or is about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N Neutral to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This will not work The vehicle can roll backward very quickly and could go out of control Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle it is steep enough to cause it to roll over If you cannot make it up the hill back straight down the hill If after stalling you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it set the parking brake put your transmission in P Park and turn off the engine Leave
180. S Cs bic Geetedadutvnte Mutasiele Wace ncaa REA 6 13 FIOM ache siete aeneimaentn east E ss ako 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 35 Ignition POSITIONS vs 2500b diecctrntatioannceniieciedeanea 2 25 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 55 Inflation Tire Pressure oo cee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee 6 62 Instrument Panel Brightness Sieci a tees 3 23 GIUSTE rarena eO Eik 3 34 OVEINVIEW niac i a E 3 4 IMMOGUCTION ors mno ana e E A 7 2 JUMP Starting resson oisean aa E 6 40 Keyless Entry System cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 2 4 Keys icis atan etapen Ena N aE hemes 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall ccceceeeeeeeeees 6 57 Lamps Back UD siccbic deh ctedan cadet beh ohewtdn and boat tweadet ucla 6 51 Daytime Running DRL eee eee eee 3 21 DOME gens cictccctnacdspnatiathianenedteenunand e Aada 3 23 Dome Lamp Override 0 ceeeeeeeneeeeee teen ee 3 23 License Plate t cccseciiidasceneas iyutiaueeieactaezaneats 6 53 Malfunction Indicator sueina 3 42 Reading 2ahealccsitiee alive neers 3 24 ap Belt sasnsts Aenean es se a E aiaei 1 50 Lap Shoulder Belt ccceseceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 43 LATCH System for Child Restraints 05 1 63 LED LIOMING isscesnsctasnas o n eS 6 51 Level Control cceaelactnnc heii Aiea ves 5 43 Liftgate Power ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eaeeeeeeee 2 14 Liftgate Liftglass 0 cceeeeee
181. SETUP If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat feature It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy exit feature See Memory Features on page 1 7 and EASY EXIT RECALL earlier for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the menu up down button to scroll through the following settings OFF No automatic seat exit will recall SEAT ONLY The driver s seat will recall TILT ONLY The steering wheel tilt feature will recall ALL default The drivers seat and the steering wheel tilt feature will recall NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 72 MEMORY SEAT RECALL This feature allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature See Memory Features on page 1 7 for more information Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default No remote memory seat recall will occur ON The driver s seat and on some vehicles the outside mir
182. SOIS sesiis iirinn sacadanedensancd ia saqetareteawiausdcmen 2 20 SUMNOOL sdecde scan cacetasseccen hlectucslewoaidsatebounteeapecdad 2 65 SYMONS orisii aeree EREE AN EEST iets 4 19 System Needs Service If eceeeeeeee eee es 4 61 Tachometer c cece ec cec eee eteeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneneenees 3 35 Text Telephone TTY Users eeeeeneeeeeee es 8 6 Theft Deterrent Feature ccccceeeeeeeee ences 3 115 Theft Deterrent Systems cceeeeeeneeeeeeeee ees 2 21 Content Theft Deterrent cccceeeeeeeeeee 2 21 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer 2 22 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation scs ncsieseuees ieee Menara 2 23 Third RoW Seat cccccceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 1 25 Throttle Adjustable ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 27 Tilt Wheel 0 ccc ccc cece cece eee ee ease ee eeeeeeeeeenenenes 3 6 14 MOS cnc csccntateccs an aa a a 6 56 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning isreernareaienyee see einni 6 102 Buying New Tires eeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 71 GHAINS ss acfaiciciaieteinsccblatnendegseanantnenmyaneheGenas 6 76 Changing a Flat Tire ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 6 78 Clanin meneame eia aE 6 103 Different SIZE secienctveid sats tens ea a 6 73 High Speed Operation eceeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 6 63 If a Tire Goes Flat pieirii nissrinnrnesi 6 77 Inflation Tire Pressure a nn 6 62 Inspecti
183. SSIST OFF After the vehicle has been started this message displays to remind the driver that the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA system has been turned off Press the set reset button to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display To turn the URPA system back on see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 42 PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the front passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON RUN Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information 3 59 REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Ope
184. See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for additional information Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous e Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the key in the driver s door From the inside use the power door locks or manual door locks To lock or unlock the door with the manual locks push down or pull up on the manual lock knob Power Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks the switches are located on the front doors m Unlock Press to unlock the doors Lock Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock the doors Delayed L
185. Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information See Adding Destinations to the Address Book later in this section Previous Destination The previous destination entry method lets you select a destination from a list of previous destination points Previous nStar Download 3421 Riverdale Milford MI So Previous Destination Touch to access the Previous Destination screen The system stores up to 20 points that have been previously entered As new destinations are entered the system automatically deletes the oldest destinations and adds the new destinations 4 31 To use the previous destination entry method From Map 1 Press the DEST hard key This destination entry method allows you to select a 2 Select the screen button destination by scrolling on the map 3 Select a previous destination from the list Use the arrow to the right of the destination to view the entire destination name as necessary Use the scroll arrows to the left to scroll through the list 4 Select the Go screen button next to the destination The map screen with the destination marked displays 5 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 6 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your R
186. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change 6 17 Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year 6 18 However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work
187. The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures or under low battery conditions If this occurs the liftgate can still be operated manually If you shift the transmission out of PARK P while the power function is in progress the liftgate power function will continue to completion If you shift the transmission out of PARK P and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed the liftgate may reverse to the open position Cargo could fall out of the vehicle Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure the lights will flash and a chime will sound The liftgate will stay open temporarily then slowly close See your dealer retailer for service before using the liftgate Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position After removing the obstruction the power liftgate operation can be used again If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle the power function will deactivate and you must manually open or close the liftgate The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center DIC will indicate that the liftgate is open After removing the obstructions manually open the liftg
188. The vehicle has Driver Shift Control DSC DSC controls the vehicle s transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by allowing you to select a desired range of gears 2 32 To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever to the M Manual Mode 2 Press the plus minus button to upshift or downshift selecting the desired range of gears for current driving conditions The DIC display will show the message MANUAL SHIFT on the first line and the current gear will be displayed on the second line See Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information The number displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that can be used However the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions This means that all gears below that number are available When 5 Fifth is selected 1 First through 5 Fifth gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle but 6 Sixth cannot be used until the plus minus button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear Grade Braking is not available when the Driver Shift Control is active See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 for more information While using the DSC cruise control and the tow haul mode can be used Tow Haul Mode The vehicle has a tow haul mode The tow haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling prov
189. Throttle 2 27 Brakes ssscetacenseaitcatagdcaaeariacondasaatecnseereccaaines 6 36 AMICK secon carn ta dace doacninengreheetreheenncorcncanaacs 5 5 Parkinge eienn UAviies endearment 2 34 System Warning Light o 3 39 Braking lt ciseetiyinwicbitiedd casdtwangenmencamoinebenacntasanes 5 4 Braking in Emergencies seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 5 6 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 24 Bucket Seats Rear c cccccceeceeceeaeeeeeeeeeeees 1 17 Bulb Replacement eceeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeees 6 53 Back Up Lamps Ambulance Body 6 51 FOO Lamps sncedietuctsvicta deste seta evi 3 22 Headlamp Aiming eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tensa eens 6 48 Headlamps icc cca csncs bevweacensacensetecerendscentenes utes 6 51 High Intensity Discharge HID Lighting 6 51 License Plate Lamps ccseeeeeeeeeeeneeees 6 53 Buying New Mres creearea e iaies 6 71 Calibration iccccietsa chorhgninapihideddgiteddacdinagmaaaieess 3 53 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 4 WAPFMING teases cre arena iaa 6 4 Galifornia Fuel ticicie ctaeecagieciece enne en aa aana 6 6 Camera Rear VISION ssssssssressreserrrrrrrrrrrrrene 2 48 Canadian OWnels sisi henaihiesteds an oi iii Capacities and Specifications eeeeee 6 113 Carbon Monoxide cccccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 2 14 Engine EXNaust sccccrssiedecasa
190. VWR of 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg a RGAWR of 4 000 Ibs 1 814 kg anda GCWR Gross Combination Weight Rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The trailer rating should be 14 000 Ibs 6350 kg 5 500 Ibs 2495 kg GCWR Vehicle Weight 8 500 Ibs 3855 kg Trailer Rating Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight 850 Ibs 886 kg and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself as much as 1 5 times as much The weight at the rear axle could be 850 Ibs 386 kg X 1 5 1 275 Ibs 578 kg 5 48 Since the rear axle already weighs 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg adding 1 275 Ibs 578 kg brings the total to 3 975 lbs 1 803 kg This is very close to but within the limit for RGAWR as well The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8 500 Ibs 3 856 kg If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well 300 Ibs 136 kg could be added to the front axle weight and 400 Ibs 181 kg to the rear axle weight The vehicle now weighs 2 800 Ibs 1270kg 2 700 Ibs 1225 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Front 400 Ibs 181 kg Rear 6 200 Ibs 2812 kg Total Weight is still below 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg and you might think 700 additional pounds 318 kg should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits The maximum trailer would only be 7
191. Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 54 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload Rainsense II Wipers The vehicle has Rainsense II windshield wipers These wipers automatically turn on when a sensor mounted next to the inside rearview mirror detects moisture on the windshield When active these wipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers To turn on the Rainsense feature the wipers must be set to one of the five delay settings Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rain sensor Since different drivers have different setting preferences it is recommended that the mid range setting position three be used initially For more wipes select the higher settings for fewer wipes select the lower settings located closer to the off position on the multifunction lever The rain sensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from off to high speed according to the weather conditions The wipers can be left ina Rainsense mode even when it is not raining When Rainsense II is active the headlamps will turn on automatically after approximately eight wipes The headlamps will turn off if the wiper switch is set to a delay position and there have been no wipes for approximately three minutes or if the wiper switch is turned to the off pos
192. a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the blades Bugs road grime sap and a buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by e Extreme dusty conditions e Sand and salt e Heat and sun e Snow and ice without proper removal 6 102 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or a
193. a surround sound listening experience from a CD or XM stereo digital audio source Centerpoint delivers five independent audio channels from conventional two channel stereo recordings not available for AM or FM Driver Adjusts the audio to give the driver the best possible sound quality Rear Adjusts the audio to give the rear seat occupants the best possible sound quality 2 CH Channel Enhances surround sound 5 1 CH Channel Gives a full affect of surround sound listening This button is only available when playing DVD video and DVD audio discs that support 5 1 audio and the RSA is off Radio Menu asia Sa Limit Features While Driving bd Number of Preset Pages RemovelAdd M 1 Categories Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu screen then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Radio is selected or touch the Radio screen button to make changes for radio information displayed or to limit features while driving number of preset pages XM categories and Bose AudioPilot 4 67 Limit Features While Driving Touch the Limit Features While Driving screen button to turn on and off the ability to limit functions while driving When this screen button is highlighted the following functions will be limited while driving e Music Navigator Scrolling e Radio Category Scrolling e Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions Number of Preset Pages Touch the Number of Preset Pages screen button to ch
194. able the digital speedometer on the DIC Press the customization button until DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The digital soeedometer will be disabled ON default The digital soeedometer will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 73 FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The customization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 74 EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the customization button until PRESS v TO EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button once to e
195. ack Map More and Avoid These buttons have common functions across all three Detailed Traffic Event screens Back Press to return to the previous screen Map If available press to display the related traffic event on the map Map Traffic Event Icon with Back Screen More Press to display more of the traffic event description if the whole event does not fit in the given display Avoid This button is used to avoid the location of an event on the route If selected a new route is calculated and the related traffic event is avoided After the new route has been calculated the navigation system goes to the full map screen and shows the new route The Avoid button is only available if the event is on the route ahead Traffic Voice Prompts The traffic voice prompts are part of the current navigation voice prompts If the navigation voice prompts are turned off all traffic prompts are also turned off If the voice prompts are on whenever an Alert for Approaching Traffic is displayed the system gives the related voice prompt The content of the voice prompt depends on actual traffic event data The RPT Repeat hard key is for navigation traffic maneuvers only It is not used to repeat traffic prompts During a traffic voice prompt if RPT is pressed the current prompt playback cancels Traffic prompts are disabled during OnStar or Voice Recognition activity Display Sound Radio N Display OFF B
196. action control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If the traction control system is off then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Off Road Driving Vehicles with all wheel drive can be used for off road driving Vehicles without all wheel drive and vehicles with 22 inch tire wheel assemblies should not be driven off road
197. acturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 for more information If driving on dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the engine air cleaner filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6 When the engine air cleaner filter is removed lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt If the engine air cleaner filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 1 Locate the air cleaner filter assembly See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 2 Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover 3 6 20 Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing Care should be
198. ag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first second and third rows if equipped with a third row seat The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent a
199. age or disengage the front axle It is fully automatic and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see Four Wheel Drive in the Two mode Hybrid Supplement Steering Power Steering If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
200. ake a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again e Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section e If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 195 feet 60 m away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 With Remote Start and Power Liftgate and Liftglass Without Remote Start Similar The following functions may be available if this vehicle has the RKE system Lock Press to lock all the doors If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn chirps when is pressed again within three seconds See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for additional information Pressing arms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 a Unlock Press once to unlock only the driver door If is pressed again within three seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the turn signal l
201. akes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points e There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only wher
202. al Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program E MOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Service In the United States or Canada call 1 800 882 1112 Text Telephone TTY U S only call 1 888 889 2438 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready e Your name home address and home telephone number e Telephone number of your location e Location of the vehicle e Model year
203. al for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information A Accessories and Modifications eeeeeeeee 6 3 Accessory POWER chic cscscicceacesieicdase conden oie sataneesae 2 26 Accessory Power Outlets cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 25 Additional Required Services Scheduled Maintenance cceceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeaes 7 6 Additives Fuel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 6 6 Add On Electrical Equipment 0 eeeeee 6 105 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 27 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceceeeeeeeeeee es 6 19 Airbag Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Venele arie a siateiencnsa 1 94 Airbag System How Does an Airbag Restrain ceeee 1 85 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeees 1 87 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 93 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 1 85 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 86
204. al stowed position before folding a rear seat The seatback will fold forward Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try moving the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position 2 Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat to release the seatback 3 Lift the lever again to Returning the Seat s to the Sitting release the rear of the Position seat from the floor n The seat will tumble To return the seat to the sitting position do the following forward 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 20 Folding and Tumbling the Seat s from the Third Row Seats A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has the
205. alifornia Proposition 65 Warning 006 6 4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 2 6 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle anisses eiin wedge den 6 5 UCI aE A E R 6 5 Gasoline Octane ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneees 6 5 Gasoline Specifications c ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 6 6 California Fuel i 22 ccsencsaeeceecccecteeeseaseeenee st caenns 6 6 AGOIIVES jistsiscciesers a O E E A EN 6 6 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol 0 0 ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeee tenes 6 7 Fuels in Foreign Countries c cseeeeeneeeeenes 6 8 Fillingithe Tank erossa aa a 6 9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 005 6 11 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 12 Hood Release 52 sc cacincsecaatengeiewess cbaiseeewncgenss 6 13 Engine Compartment Overview 5 6 14 Enginer Oll seirene aean a E ES 6 15 Engine Oil Life System nacen 6 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 0 ee 6 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid 0eeeeee 6 20 Cooling System ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeaeenes 6 24 Engine Coolant seseorg aine ani 6 25 Engine Overheating eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee ees 6 30 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 6 33 Engine Fan Noise eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 33 Power Steering Fluid cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 6 33
206. als that allow you change their positions The feature will not operate when the vehicle is in R Reverse or while using the cruise control ag SD gt The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the center console below the climate control system Press the right and left arrows to move the pedals either closer or further from your body Before you start driving fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you While driving make only small adjustments The vehicle has a memory function which allows the pedal positions to be saved and recalled See Memory Features on page 1 7 for more information 2 27 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above O F 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment near the power steering fluid reservoir 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet 2 28 A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock
207. als and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your GM dealer retail
208. am is aimed to the horizontal tape line Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam 6 50 9 Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line The lamp on the left A shows the correct headlamp aim The lamp on the right B shows the incorrect headlamp aim Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp Bulb Replacement LED Lighting For the proper type of replacement bulbs see The vehicle may have LED headlamps For replacement Replacement Bulbs on page 6 53 of the LED lighting assembly contact your dealer retailer For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Back Up Lamps To replace this bulb High Intensity Discharge HID s 1 Open the liftgate Lighting See Power Liftgate on page 2 14 for more information A CAUTION The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage If you try to service any of the system components you could be seriously injured Have your dealer retailer or a qualified technician service them The vehicle may have HID headlamps After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally This is normal 2 Remove the two 5 Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket ae from he 6 Press a new bulb into the
209. amps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 If enabled through the DIC the exterior lights turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside See APPROACH LIGHTING under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press Q to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 8 for additional information lt Power Liftgate Press and hold to open and close the liftgate The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing lt Liftglass Press and hold to open the liftglass 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or 4 is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work The vehicle comes with two transmitters Each transmitter will have a number on top of it 1 or 2 These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle For example the memory seat position for driver 1 will
210. and Controls Object Detection Systems ceeeees 2 42 Storage Areas l a rererere 2 62 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 2 42 GIOVE BOX ciectrauichtansecsnancian tatutacamencete EEEE 2 62 Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA eeeeeeeee ee 2 44 GUPNOIMENS aereoa a ea E EEEE 2 62 Rear Vision Camera RVC secese 2 48 Center Console Storage eeceeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 63 OnStar System ccccccecccceeeeseseeeseeseseseeees 2 52 ASSISt Handles ess anne asr sae aa 2 63 Garment Hooks cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 63 Universal Home Remote System 2 55 2 Luggage Carrier ccceeceeeeeeeeeee eee esia 2 64 Universal Home Remote System Rear Storage Area 2 65 Operation With Three Round LED 2 55 JS STOA ee te ae p Rear Seat Armrest siccepcscosccscsetmceedonccebesdoanst 2 65 SUNTO errecisioriona nimike ee E Eaa 2 65 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key can be used for the ignition and door locks See you
211. and Specifications on page 6 113 for the wheel nut torque specification 6 88 11 Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire you must also reinstall the center cap Line the tab on the back of the cap with the slot in the wheel Place the cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible If the cable is not visible proceed to Step 6 Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6 92 A CAUTION Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and 2 If it is visible first try to tighten the cable by turning you and others could get hurt Read and follow the the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks instructions listed next or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If
212. and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 3 43 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection e The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on e The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 3 44 Oil Pressure Light A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the ve
213. and routing guidance is already active the navigation system by coordinates is not available the Go and Map adds the downloaded destination as the next waypoint in buttons gray out and routing will not be available the existing route All features such as Call and Add to Press the blue OnStar button for further assistance Address Book will be available for the waypoint Refer to the section on Waypoints for more information The Call button grays out when there is no phone number available for your destination and while Previous Destinations connected to OnStar Previous OnStar Destination Downloads are saved under Previous Destinations in the navigation system where they can be accessed or saved to the address book 4 37 Map Destination Screen Functions Getting Started on Your Route If the map screen is used to show destination it will Once a destination has been entered there are several have map screen capabilities such as Go Mark Zoom functions that can be performed Press the DEST hard Scroll etc The address is shown at the top of the key to access the Route screen screen ute Suspend Guidance Cancel Guidance S Add Stopover Voice ee Current Position Destination Map Screen 4 38 Turn List Turn List Touch to view the list of turn maneuvers for the entire route and to avoid turns on the route Route Preview Select to preview the entire route in either direction Kd Revers
214. ange the number of preset pages 1 through 6 Each preset page can contain five preset stations Touch the desired numbered screen button Bose AudioPilot AudioPilot The Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology To use AudioPilot 1 Press the CONFIG key to enter the menu screen then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Radio is selected or touch the Radio screen button 2 Press the Automatic Volume Control screen button to access the AudioPilot menu 3 Press the ON screen button 4 68 To turn it off touch the OFF screen button When on AudioPilot continuously adjusts the audio system equalization to compensate for background noise so that the music sound is consistent at the set volume level This feature is most effective at lower volume settings where background noise can affect how well the music being played is heard through the vehicle s audio system At higher volume settings where the music is much louder than the background noise there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot For more information on AudioPilot visit bose com audiopilot Remove Add XM Categories Touch the Remove Add XM Categories screen button to remove or add XM categories when selecting XM categories from the category list screen The list of XM categories appear on the screen Use the up and down arrow screen buttons to scroll through the list The categories to remove are highlighted and the categorie
215. ank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs 75 kg sitting on the driver seat e Have the tires properly inflated e Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle s low beam headlamps The high beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam headlamps are aimed properly To adjust the vertical aim 1 Open the hood See Hood Release on page 6 13 for more information 2 Locate the center of the projector lens of the low beam headlamp 3 Record the distance from the ground to the center of the projector lens of the low beam headlamp 4 At a wall measure from the ground upward A to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it 5 Draw or tape a horizontal line B on the wall the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4 Notice Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut off when aiming Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build up which may cause damage to the headlamp 6 Turn on the low beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface 6 49 7 Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx socket 8 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp be
216. ant to raise the level from 0 0 mm to 1 8 inch 3 2 mm below the filler plug hole e When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole 6 47 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if the vehicle is damaged in a crash the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be adjusted It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer retailer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted It is possible however to re aim the headlamps as described 6 48 The vehicle should Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft 7 6 m from a light colored wall or other flat surface e Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface e Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface e Not have any snow ice or mud on it e Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed Be normally loaded with a full t
217. anufacturer of the garage door opener motor If there are a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above the garage Switch Position door opener is a Fixed Code unit If you do not Or VEA Hone see a row of dip switches return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote Rolling Code Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Your hand held transmitter can have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter Switch Number 2 58 Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above but they should be similar The switch positions on the hand held transmitter could be labeled as follows e A switch in the up position could be labeled as Up rae or On e A switch in the down position could be labeled as Down mon or Off e A switch in the middle position could be labeled as Middle 0 or Neutral 3 Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows e When a switch is in the up position write Left e When a switch is in the down position write Right e If a switch is set between the up and down position write Middle The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in St
218. any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 6 77 Changing a Flat Tire If your vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 A CAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly Put the shift lever in P Park 3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
219. at have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function varies for each disc Fourth Press m 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection J Clear Press within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs 10 Double Digit Entries Press to select chapter or track numbers greater than 9 Press this button before entering the number Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries 1 Slide the rear cover back on the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Recommended Action The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The remote control does not work After stopping the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The ignition might not be turned ON RUN or in ACC ACCESSORY Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control
220. ate constantly Notice If the wheel s of one axle is allowed to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak ABS and brake warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are displayed the transfer case could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel s excessively while these lights and messages are displayed The traction control system may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts downshifts of the transmission When this happens a reduction in acceleration may be noticed or a noise or vibration may be heard This is normal If cruise control is being used when the system activates the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise control will automatically disengage Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 13 StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle see your dealer retailer for service Magnetic Ride Control The vehicle may have the MagneRide control system MagneRide constantly checks speed wheel position lift dive and steering of the vehicle The damping force for each shock absorber and adjustment level is chosen for the best ride and handling MagneRide also works with the tow haul switch that when engaged wil
221. ate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position The liftgate will now resume normal power operation Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side edges of the liftgate If an object is caught between the liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually Do not force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle Manual Operation of Power Liftgate To change the liftgate to manual operation press the switch on the overhead console to the OFF position With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors unlocked the liftgate can be manually opened and closed To open the liftgate press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open To close the liftgate use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close The liftgate latch will power close Always close the liftgate before driving If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled the lights will flash three times but the liftgate will not move It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open however if you must drive with the liftgate open the liftgate should be set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center console The liftgate has an electric latch If the battery i
222. ature setting of 60 F 15 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum cooling setting If a temperature setting of 90 F 32 C is chosen the system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on the headlamps To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed Manual Operation A amp V Fan Control Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the fan speed Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the system on Pressing either arrow while using automatic operation will place the fan in manual operation The fan setting will display and the AUTO light will turn off The air delivery will remain in automatic operation ad Air Delivery Mode Control Press to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display When the system is turned off the display goes blank after displaying the current status of the system 7a Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outl
223. ave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and P Park This position locks the rear wheels It is the move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting into best position to use when you start the engine because Park on page 2 36 If you are pulling a trailer see the vehicle cannot move easily Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 2 29 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 31 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart when you are already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the
224. back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for five minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a loss in power and engine performance This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Fan Noise The vehicle has electric cooling fans You might hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving The fans can turn off if no cooling is required Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures or if you are operating the air cond
225. basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 6 101 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
226. battery post To uncover the remote positive terminal open the red plastic cover 6 41 5 OY A CAUTION An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan ETA Kr DK RT ial CG BS b OSNND 2 x G i eet Z CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery The remote negative terminal is a stud located gas to explode People have been hurt doing this on the right front of the engine where the negative and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if battery cable attaches you need more light See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information on the location of the remote positive and remote negative terminals Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present CAUTION Continued 6 42 Do not connect positive to negative or you CAUTION Continued will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you the dead battery because this can cause sparks Do not get it on you
227. be towed out Recovery hooks can be used if the vehicle has them If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 40 5 32 Recovery Hooks A CAUTION These hooks when used are under a lot of force Always pull the vehicle straight out Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification Tire label A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Notice Never use recovery hooks to tow the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged and it would either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle not be covered by warranty Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the your vehicle handles These could cause you vehicle you can use them if you are stuck off road and to lose control and crash Also overloading need to be pulled to some place where you can can shorten the life of the vehicle continue driving
228. bilizer The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK OFF position You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem wit
229. ble on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 6 74 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive tempe
230. brasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep
231. buckle so that the it can be buckled safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 4 If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information 1 44 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but not falling off the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Squeeze the buttons A on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide After the adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it down
232. camera uses a special lens The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance The area displayed by the camera is limited The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if e The RVC is turned off See Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off earlier in this section e It is dark e The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens e Ice snow mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens Clean the lens rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth e The back of the vehicle is in an accident the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer retailer e There are extreme temperature changes es ER Corners of Bumper _ 4 2 51 OnStar System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an au
233. can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Some things to consider e Is the path ahead clear e Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead e Does the travel take you uphill or downhill e Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly When driving over obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands When driving over bumps rocks or other obstacles the wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking Off roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not Driving on Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do There are some hills that simply cannot be driven no matter how well built the vehicle A CAUTION Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If
234. cap fully See Filling the Tank on page 6 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off 3 63 TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 64 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 for more information TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC you can damage the transmission This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by 3 64 your warranty Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed This message displays along with four chimes if
235. carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the hoist end of extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 14 Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been inspected and or replaced To continue changing the flat tire see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6 84 6 91 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place Notice Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel tire repaired as soon as possible Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier 6 92 A B C g omm Hoi
236. ccident Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control apply the parking brake Shift to P Park and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine will not start get out and get help 5 21 Driving Across an Incline An off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill To decide whether to try to drive across the incline consider the following A CAUTION Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline do not drive across it Find another route instead e Ahill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across When going straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end But when driving across an incline the narrower track width the distance between the left and right wheels might not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over 5 22 Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover e Surface conditions can be a problem Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause the tires
237. ccidentally activate this the vehicle s setting will automatically be reset each time the ignition is turned off and then on again 3 20 Cleaning the IntelliBeam Light Sensor The light sensor is located on the inside of the vehicle Z in front of the inside E rearview mirror Clean the light sensor window periodically using glass cleaner on a soft cloth Gently wipe the sensor window Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the surface of the sensor window Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open a reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and the key is out of the ignition To turn off the chime turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then back on or close and re open the door In the AUTO mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK OFF or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends if enabled in the DIC See Exit Lighting under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met e The ignition is on e The exterior lamps control is in AUTO e The transmission is not in P Park The light sensor determines it is daytime When the DRL are on only the DRL
238. ccieeeeeees aiaiai 6 105 HRGA cera EAE 2 14 Lumbar Controls vesiis enie 1 4 Reclining Seatbacks ricn annens eani 1 8 Retained Accessory RAP ccecce 2 26 Seat serpen ri aE E ERSE O EER 1 3 Steering Fluid 2 0 eee eee eee cece eee eee een eee eees 6 33 WIMGOWS skrikende oee cua tenchnwddan bas lase sone ca oncan 2 18 Power Assist StepS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 2 16 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts eee 1 50 PRIVACY esae E E 8 16 Navigation System eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeee ees 8 18 ONStal inea aaea E T 8 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 8 18 Problems with Route Guidance eeeee 4 61 Program Courtesy Transportation c eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 8 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Proposition 65 Warning California 05 6 4 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 2 00 cece e eee tence eens 8 18 Radios RRECODUION 20 ccesciednntacesae aon aa tats 3 116 Theft Deterrent cccceeeeee eect este seen eene 3 115 Rainsense Wipers ecsceeeeeeeeeeeenereees 3 10 Reading amps eiaeaen epeh 3 24 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls 008 3 32 Rear Axle chic Seated danct bea a aE EE SE 6 46 LOCKING 5 9 Rear Door Security Locks ssssssssesreeesnreeene 2 11 Rear Heated Seats ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 10 Rear Seat Armrest
239. ceceseseceeceesseeeeeeeseees 1 10 Securing a Child Restraint in the Rear Seats 1 10 Right Front Seat Position c eeee 1 76 Heated Seats isica sac cate cticietaiesuteaciarantransneamiid 1 10 Airbag System 0 0 0 ete 1 79 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row 1 11 Where Are the Airbags Se eee eee 1 81 Bucket Seats Second ROW u e 1 17 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 84 Third Row Seat cccccccsescecseeseeeeseseseeeeeeees 1 25 What Makes an Airbag Inflate eee 1 85 How Does an Airbag Restrain a se 1 85 eet ee er es ae aD es What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 86 ah care a a et Oe ea ea as Passenger Sensing System seseeeeeeeees 1 87 He ies cati Belts Properly ioe Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 93 a A a l Pee EE ae manne le Adding Equipment to Your Lap Balt Ee Ha RE QNANES ansietat a Airbag Equipped Vehicle cc0cc000 1 94 Safety Belt Extender ccscceccssessesseeseet 51 Restraint System Check 0 0 00 eee 1 95 p Checking the Restraint Systems 1 95 ee ee EE E E EE AE ET EF Replacing Restraint System Parts Infants and Young Children o 1 55 After a GASH cdciecsscscsacsecsesageccus bes n ini 1 96 1 1 Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions A CAUTION With head restraints that are not installed and adjus
240. cedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the fluid level Perform the hot check procedure at the first opportunity Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is between 80 F and 90 F 27 C and 32 C 1 Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for more information 2 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading 6 22 5 If the fluid level is below the COLD check band add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band It does not take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5L Do not overfill Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160 F to 200 F 71 C to 93 C If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place
241. cle is moving various functions are disabled to reduce driver distractions Hard Keys The following hard keys are located on the navigation system D Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume to the audio system Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the navigation system the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE and Rear Seat Audio RSA If the vehicle has not been tuned off the RSE and the RSA can be turned back on by pressing this knob and continues play of the last active source Tune Turn to go to the next or previous radio station or disc track or chapter See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information A DVD Map Disc Eject Press to eject the DVD map disc This button is located next to the upper disc slot See Maps on page 4 15 for more information Load Press to load CDs or audio video DVDs See CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information A CD DVD Eject Press to eject CDs or audio video DVDs This button is located under the load button See CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information Disc Up Down Press the up or down arrows to go to the next or previous disc AUDIO Press access the full Audio screen to change AM FM XM Satellite Radio Service if equipped CD DVD and auxiliary input See Audio unde
242. cneceds iaaea 2 38 Winter DIVING evteenccc2nwagione raven nentdad incantation 5 29 Care of Safety BeltS 22 0 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeees 6 100 Center Console Storage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 63 Center Seat sscaarssc senses enisiacantanceie ean a E eR 1 10 Chains Tire siaren a osie ai 6 76 Charging System Light svscscssrssesircriinsrerisisss 3 38 Check Engine Lamp c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 Checking Things Under the Hood 565 6 12 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 104 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children s s 1 55 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 63 Older Children ccc026 ccc sesescciweseeessivecsacaavereess 1 52 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position citi sieeeteceetineveeeeseaetenes 1 71 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 75 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 76 SySteMS seca edre en aas rera ee aE E EEEa EREE 1 59 Where to Put the Restraint 0 1 61 Cigarette Lighter sociecncncissroreneneinsesrnanoes 3 26 Circuit Breakers sic seca Wess cinrsoaneteseeseed 6 106 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 6 102 Exterior Lamps Lenses seeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 101 Fabric Carpet cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 6 98 FINISH Cale vices deseesearcieee
243. cord up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will return to zero To stop the timer press the set reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the set reset button while TIMER is displayed Transmission Temperature Press the trip fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C Average Vehicle Speed Press the trip fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED displays This display shows the average speed in miles per hour MPH or kilometers per hour km h Blank Display This display shows no information Vehicle Information Menu Items i Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following menu items Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You should change the oil as soon as you can See Engine Oil on page 6 15 I
244. could occur Even with URPA always check behind the vehicle before backing up While backing be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle s mirrors The display is located near the passenger side rear window and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder URPA uses three color coded lights to provide distance and system information How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph 8 km h If the vehicle is above this speed the red light on the rear display will flash To be detected objects must be at least 10 inches 25 4 cm off the ground and below liftgate level Objects must also be within 8 feet 2 5 m from the rear bumper This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather A single beep will sound the first time an object is detected between 40 inches 1 m and 8 feet 2 5 m away Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle is at 23 inches 0 6 m or closer to an object The following describes what will occur with the URPA display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object Description English _ Metric amber light amber amber lights amber amber red lights and continuous beeping 23 in 0 6m for five seconds amber amber red lights flashing and continuous 1 ft 0 3m beeping for five seconds The sys
245. creen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information Point of Interest POI The Point of Interest POI destination entry method lets you select a destination from the POI list OPO Name Input POI Name owg n H Point of Interest Touch to access the POI Point of Interest screen From this screen you have two options to select enter a destination Enter the name using the alpha keyboard or select a category from the category list To use the point of interest destination entry method by entering the name 1 Press the DEST hard key 2 Select the X screen button 3 Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province 4 Enter the POI name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available POls Select this button to view the list 5 Select the Go screen button next to the POI The map screen with the destination marked displays 6 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 7 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this sec
246. ct the airflow Operation Tips e Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work far better reducing the chance of fogging the inside of the windows e When you enter a vehicle in cold weather press the fan up button to the maximum fan level before driving This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the window e Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout the vehicle e Adding outside equipment to the front of the vehicle such as hood air deflectors may affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle 3 31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls they are integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls A Fan Control B Air Delivery Mode Control C Temperature Control 3 32 REAR Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off An indicator comes on when the rear system is on The r
247. cted or press the Nav screen button 2 Touch the Traffic Options button 3 Touch the Traffic button This button is highlighted when it is active Selecting Alert for Approaching Traffic Events enables the system to show a pop up screen that notifies of possible traffic issues ahead When this feature is highlighted while traveling on a route accidents located on the route are indicated and can be avoided 4 49 Traffic Icon Traffic Status Icon The Traffic Icon appears on the Traffic Tab next to the word Traffic when traffic is found in the local area Traffic events are in the area but none are on uae D route The Traffic Icon has three different condition displays These are Condition Traffic Status Icon e No XM NavTraffic subscription e No Traffic is found in Traffic events are on route the local area e The Traffic Feature is turned off 4 50 Locations and Information of Traffic Conditions The system may take some time to sort the information The list of traffic conditions display in the order of distance from the vehicle up to approximately 75 mi 125 km With a route planned the system defaults to list traffic events on your route Without a route planned if travelling on a major interstate the system lists events immediately ahead on the interstate first Then all other traffic events follow Not all traffic conditions may be listed To view the traffic condit
248. d Press to go to the previous radio station stored as a favorite the next track if a CD DVD is playing to reject an incoming call or end a current call 3 115 amp Mute Push to Talk Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press and hold amp for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 52 and Bluetooth on page 3 75 for more information SRCE Source Voice Recognition Press to switch between the radio AM FM XM CD DVD and rear auxiliary if equipped Press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition on page 4 86 for more information lt lt J Volume Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume Dbl Seek Press to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM Press Pl to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press the if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player 3 116 Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM
249. d child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts 1 61 A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured
250. d cscs oeecacsaaveeecieeeass 6 101 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic WDUMACES ssas eeraa a eE 6 99 IMLGNON ticassat e a a E E comes 6 96 keather srren nennen aa a EE 6 98 Speaker Covers ssscaietivnsitadeapeelehec 6 100 CS E EE A E E 6 103 Underbody Maintenance 6 104 Washing Your Vehicle ceceeeeeeee eee eee ee 6 100 Cleaning cont WealhersillpS ricrea 6 100 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 6 102 Wood Panels miser oae E RR 6 100 Climate Control System Outlet Adjustment cceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Electroni cicdcccusetedesdeeeeti iid ae eN eE 3 32 Climate Control Systems Dual AULOMATIC 2 ccccccceeeed cate seeestadaciee nest eneee 3 27 0 010 E Meeineoenveselneveels 3 26 Collision Damage Repair c eseeeeeeeeeeeeenes 8 12 COMPASS merisier arainn E r i E ates 3 53 Content Theft Deterrent cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21 Control of a Vehicle cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 3 Coolant ENGINE rasata aF 6 25 Engine Temperature Gage eeeeeeeee eres 3 41 Cooled Seals nss nin nra a abana oiia 1 6 Cooling SYSTEM eiriau nani onarri canes 6 24 Courtesy Transportation Program seseeeeeeee 8 10 Cruise Control ccecceceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 PH OM SEEE E A E danish aces A E ee 3 46 Cupholder t iira ne aa E aa candy 2 62 Customer Assistance 6 cee
251. d have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 1 31 Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop 1 32 The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense 1 33 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A pr Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most prot
252. d periodically provided that the map information has changed 4 61 If you have any questions about the operation of the navigation system or the update process contact the GM Nav Disc Center toll free phone number 1 877 NAV DISC 1 877 628 3472 or go to the center s website gmnavdisc com If you need any updates or a replacement disc because the current disc is lost damaged or needs to be updated call the GM Nav Disc Center or order a new disc online To order a disc have your Vehicle Identification Number VIN available This helps the center make sure you receive the correct and most up to date DVD map disc for your vehicle See Vehicle Identification Number VIN in the Index of your vehicle s owner manual for more information After receiving the updated disc replace the old disc in the navigation system See Installing the DVD Map Disc and Ejecting the DVD Map Disc under Maps on page 4 15 Dispose of the old disc to avoid confusion about which disc is the most current Database Coverage Explanations Coverage area depends upon the map detail available Some areas have greater map detail than others The navigation system works only as well as the information provided on the map disc See Ordering Map DVDs on page 4 61 on how to obtain updated map information 4 62 Navigation Audio System Notice Before adding any sound equipment to the vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio
253. d start entering the street name or touch the Last 5 Streets screen button If the street name is common the city might need to be entered first The Last 5 Streets screen displays a list of the last five street names that had been entered Select a street from the list and it appears in the Street name area If using the alpha keyboard finish entering the street name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available streets Select this button to view the list and select a street Once a street has been selected select the House screen button to enter the house number The system displays the house number range that is available for the street Once the house number is selected the city name automatically populates If there is more than one city available for selection a list of cities display Select the city Select the Go screen button The map screen with the destination marked displays Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information 4 27 To enter a destination by entering a cross street i 2 3 Press the DEST hard key Select th
254. d through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press amp and begin speaking to answer the call Press C V to ignore a call 3 83 Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press again to return to the original call e To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action e Press C VY to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all the callers together 3 84 Ending a Call Press C V to end a call Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready
255. defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed The recirculation mode can also be turned off by turning off the ignition REAR For vehicles with the rear heating and air conditioning controls Press the REAR button to turn the rear climate control system on or off See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls on page 3 32 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window G3 Rear Window Defogger Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off It automatically turns off after it has been activated The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Heated Mirrors For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2 42 Heated or Cooled Seats For vehicles with heated seats or heated and cooled seats see Heated Seats on page 1 5 or Heated and Cooled Seats on page 1 6 Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of the instrument panel to dire
256. der light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 35 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 6 100 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 for more information Notice lf an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 85 See your dealer retailer for service 1 95 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies in
257. der they were burned to the disc 1 02 47 04 22 002 010 Ji Leavea Listento Don tshu If only I v Press STOP if a disc is playing Press the up or down navigation arrows on the remote control to go through the folder list on the left side of the screen 2 Press ENTER when the desired folder is highlighted 3 Press the up or down navigation arrows to go through the song list and highlight the desired song Press ENTER to begin the playback of the selected song Skipping a Song NEXT Press to go to the next song PREV Previous Press to return to the beginning of the song that is currently playing Press PREV twice to go to the previous song Selecting a Play Mode The order the songs are played can be temporarily chosen on a disc The FOLDER play mode is the default Press the REPEAT button to access the play mode options The play mode options are e Single Play a selected song e Folder Play the folder in the order the songs were recorded e Shuffle Play the songs in random order from within the selected folder Using the REPEAT Feature REPEAT Press to change between Repeat One and Repeat Folder e Repeat One Repeats the song that is playing e Repeat Folder Repeats the folder that is playing 3 111 Tips and Troubleshooting Chart Recommended Action No Sound e Check that the Recommended Action correct audio i
258. ding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 1 24 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Third Row Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat the seatback s can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled or removed from the vehicle Folding the Seatback s To fold the seatback do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Remove all items on the seat cushion Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 3 Lift the release lever located on the bottom rear of the seatback on the outboard side of the seat and the seatback will fold forward 1 25 Unfolding the Seatback s To return the seatback to the upright position do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
259. ditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Overhead The vehicle may have an Overhead DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen and if the vehicle has a third row seat it could have a second video display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system 3 87 Driver Control of the Audio System The driver has basic control of the whole audio system Press and hold D for more than two seconds to turn off the radio RSE and the RSA rear seat audio See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system
260. driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If your vehicle has roof rail airbags and a third row passenger seat the airbags are located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outboard passenger positions in the third row A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked 1 83 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether
261. e screen button Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province Select the Street screen button and start entering the street name or touch the Last 5 Streets screen button If the street name is common the city might need to be entered first The Last 5 Streets screen displays a list of the last five street names that had been entered Select a street from the list and it appears in the Street name area If using the alpha keyboard finish entering the street name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available streets Select this button to view the list and select a street 4 28 Once a street has been selected select the Cross Street screen button and start entering the cross street name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available streets Select this button to view the list and select a street Select the Go screen button The map screen with the destination marked displays Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance s
262. e s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed e Avoid hard accelerations e Avoid steep uphill grades e If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as
263. e s handling and stopping ability 6 64 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 65 for additional information Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS
264. e or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 50 000 km 30 000 miles or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 6 30 6 25 What to Use A CAUTION Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 26 Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature e Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129
265. e 7 4 Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Before checking the fluid level prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level surface Keep the engine running 2 Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then move the shift lever back to P Park 4 Allow the engine to idle 500 800 rpm for at least one minute Slowly release the brake pedal a Keep the engine running and press the Trip Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP Transmission Temperature displays on the Driver Information Center DIC 6 Using the TRANS TEMP reading determine and perform the appropriate check procedure If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges allow the vehicle to cool or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached 6 21 Cold Check Pro
266. e Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 The fluid level should be above MIN If it is not have the brake hydraulic system checked to TUL see if there is a leak TA After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 6 37 What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice e Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 6 38 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and
267. e Skip Select to go back to the start point A Scroll Arrows Touch the up and down Or previouS stopov r arrows to scroll through the list of maneuvers lt q Reverse Scroll Select to scroll to the start Avoid Touch this screen button next to the adjacent point or previous stopover The ka reverse skip button street name to avoid the maneuver changes to a fast reverse screen button The map screen displays The route recalculates Il Pause Select to pause the route preview while in without this maneuver reverse or fast forward scroll 4 39 gt gt Fast Forward Scroll Select to scroll to the next stopover or to the final destination The gt fast forward skip button changes to a fast speed fast forward gt Fast Forward Skip Select to go to the next stopover or to the final destination Detour Detour Select this screen button from the Route screen then select to detour 1 mile 3 miles or 5 miles 1 km 3 km 5 km around the current route This can also be selected to detour the whole route if necessary The detour option is only available while driving ona current planned route Voice Volume Select this screen button from the Route screen to turn voice guidance on or off and to change the volume of voice prompts See Nav under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information 4 40 Add Stopover Add Stopover Select this screen button from the Route screen This feat
268. e also has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use Assist Handles Assist handles located above the rear passenger doors can be used when getting out of the vehicle Pull the handles downward to use them Garment Hooks There are garment hooks located on the assist handles 2 63 Luggage Carrier For vehicles with a luggage carrier items can be loaded on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof and crossrails if equipped which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo To adjust them turn the knob located at each end of the crossrail counterclockwise until the crossrail can move freely To secure the crossrail turn the knob located at each end of the crossrail clockwise until tightened Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 Ibs 91 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle Load cargo so that it rests as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 To prevent damage or loss of cargo check now and then to make sure the luggage and cargo are still securely fastened 2 64 Be sure the cargo is properly loaded e If small heavy objects a
269. e indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on while driving there might be a problem with the StabiliTrak system and the vehicle may need service When this warning light is on the system is off and does not limit wheel spin The light flashes if the system is active and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions See StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the indicator on the gage moves towards the shaded area on the thermostat it means that the engine coolant has overheated If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions pull off the road stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 30 Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system this light comes on briefly when the engine e is started It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the pr
270. e information Clock Touch Screen Button See Setting the Clock under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information POI Point of Interest Touch Screen Button See Displaying Points of Interest POI on the Map Screen under Symbols on page 4 19 for more information Zoom Out Touch Screen Button See Map Scales under Maps on page 4 15 for more information AK D V Seek Key Previous Next See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Tune Knob See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information NAV Navigation Key See Hard Keys under Using the Navigation System on page 4 13 for more information RPT Repeat Key See Hard Keys under Using the Navigation System on page 4 13 for more information DEST Destination Key See Destination on page 4 25 for more information CONFIG Configure Key See Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information 2 Sound Key See Sound Menu under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information R Phone Key See OnStar System on page 2 52 and Bluetooth on page 3 75 for more information FAV Favorite Key See Storing Radio Station Presets under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information AUDIO Key See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Disc Up Down Key See Hard Keys under Using the Navigation System on page
271. e load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to a maximum of 600 Ibs 272 kg with a weight carrying hitch The trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B up to the maximum of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg with a weight distributing hitch Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer 5 47 Trailering may be limited by the vehicle s ability to carry tongue weight Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating or the RGAWR Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight Consider the following example A vehicle model base weight is 5 500 Ibs 2 495 kg 2 800 Ibs 1 270 kg at the front axle and 2 700 Ibs 1 225 kg at the rear axle It has a G
272. e preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 8 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Preset Destination under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Canceling Guidance Guidance is canceled once the final destination is reached To cancel guidance prior to arrival at the final destination 1 Press the DEST hard key 2 Press the Cancel Guidance screen button 3 Press OK to confirm Guidance Volume Adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts 1 Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen button 2 Press the Voice Prompt screen button 3 Press the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or to decrease the volume of the voice prompts The system responds with the adjusted voice level See Voice Prompt under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information Cleaning the Display Use a soft clean cotton cloth dampened with clean water Features and Controls Using the Navigation System This section presents basic information needed to operate the navigation system Use the hard keys located on the navigation system along with the available touch sensitive screen buttons on the navigation screen to operate the system See Navigation System Overview on page 4 2 for more information Once the vehi
273. e to check the pressure ina specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure 6 65 Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 and Tires on page 6 56 Notice Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors Sensor damage caused by usi
274. e you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police e Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged e Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions e If the vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system and it doesn t seem to be working properly while pulling a trailer turn the system off See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 44 for more information Three important considerations have to do with weight e The weight of the trailer e The weight of the trailer tongue e And the weight on the vehicle s tires 5 45 Weight of the Trailer Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required How heavy can a trailer safely be trailering equipment The weight of additional optional It depends on how the rig is used For example speed equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle altitude road grades ou
275. ear climate control system can also be turned off by pressing and holding the button To turn the system on from the rear seats press any rear climate control button except the button Mimic Mode This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control airflow settings It comes on when REAR is pressed the first time Independent Mode This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls To turn the system on from the rear press any rear climate control button except the amp button Automatic Operation If Equipped AUTO Press the air delivery mode button until this setting is selected to control the inside temperature air delivery and fan speed AUTO appears in the display when automatic operation is active Increase Decrease Temperature Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature The rear control temperature display will show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing The display only indicates climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode Manual Operation amp amp Fan Control Press these buttons on the rear seat audio control panel to increase or decrease the airflow Pressing the fan up button when the system is off will turn the system on The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control Temperature Control Press these buttons to adjust the temperature of the air
276. ear in Arabic CHINESE All messages will appear in Chinese NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 66 AUTO DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT VEHICLE SPEED The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set res
277. ease or increase the hours Minutes Press the minus or plus signs to decrease or increase the minutes 12 24 Format Select the 12 screen button for standard time select the 24 screen button for military time Global Positioning System GPS The navigation system determines the position of the vehicle by using satellite signals various vehicle signals and map data At times other interferences such as the satellite condition road configuration the condition of the vehicle and or other circumstances can interfere with the navigation system s ability to determine the accurate position of the vehicle The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using signals sent by the GPS Satellites of the United States Department of Defense When the vehicle is not receiving signals from the satellites a symbol appears on the map screen Refer to Symbols on page 4 19 This system may not be available or interferences may occur if any of the following are true e Signals are obstructed by tall buildings trees large trucks or a tunnel e Objects are located on the front dash of the vehicle e Satellites are being repaired or improved e After market glass tinting has been applied to the vehicle s windshield Notice Do not apply after market glass tinting to the vehicle s windows Glass tinting interferes with the system s ability to receive GPS signals and causes the system to malfunction The window might
278. ease to the right 4 Lift the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches 152 mm from the closed position pause then push the front center of the hood with a swift firm motion to fully close the hood Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information When you open the hood on the 6 2L engine this is what you will see C D E HAAN l Ze y 7 E aa f L AzA Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 6 24 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 6 40 Battery on page 6 39 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 15 Automatic Transmission Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6 20 Remote Negative Terminal GND Out of View See Jump Starting on page 6 40 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Cooling Fan Out of View See Cooling System on page 6 24 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View See Power Steering Fluid on page 6 33 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 6 36 L Underhood Fuse Block on page 6 109
279. econds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone 3 79 3 Say the first digit to be stored The system will Using the Directory Command repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be The directory command lists all of the name tags stored stored is complete by the system To use the directory command e lf an unwanted number is recognized by the 1 Press and hold E for two seconds The system system say Clear at any time to clear the responds with Ready followed by a tone last number 2 Say Directory The system responds with To hear all of the numbers recognized by the Directory and then plays back all of the stored system say Verify at any time and the name tags When the list is complete the system system will repeat them returns to the main menu 4 After the complete number has been entered say Deleting Name Tags Store The system responds with Please say the f name tag followed by a tone The system uses the following commands to delete 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name name tags tag is recorded and the system responds with Delete About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK Delete all name tags e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step
280. ect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba 3 92 Remote Control Buttons D Power Press to turn the video screen on and off X Illumination Press to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on 4 Title Press to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function can vary for each disc Main Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A vV lt gt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt t
281. ection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 34 Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are ina crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 52 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 55 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know WO
282. ector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 Special Equipment Option Upfitter Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker Driver Seat Circuit Breaker Underhood Fuse Block Rear Sliding Window The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle Lift the cover for access to the fuse relay block If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out 6 109 oe foel Eeg foe E C123 C139 C143 e FAN CNTRL a LOHID E173 e E C193 C207 e C24 2590263027 CR py C312 B Siok Grn a Ri e339 ag gi o Tec E car caesa e e C402 O TP e C4304 ae S tara Je C48 C49 c50 C51 C52 C53 C543 C55 RUN C56 CANK Right Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Electronic Stability Suspension Control Automatic Level Control Exhaust Left Trailer Stop Turn Lamp Engine Controls 6 110 Fuses T Engine Control Module Throttle Control Fuel Injectors Ignition Coils Right Side Transmission Control Module Battery Vehicle Back up Lamps Headlamp Fuses Usage _ Left Side 2
283. ed Starting the Engine If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is are already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped 2 26 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSO
284. ed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing lt phone name gt e The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls 3 85 Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the number to send 3 86 If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say a name ta
285. edal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water 5 26 Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include e Allow extra following distance e Pass with caution e Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape e Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 6 56 e Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean T
286. edo anae aa E Oi 2 40 E Object Detection Systems on TE aeaa OnStar SyS EM seriesas erein 2 52 e E E E E E EE E EE E 6 5 Universal Home Remote System _ 2 55 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 6 12 Storage Areas ascssntcancutncealetaisaractiseiaicedas 2 62 All Wheel Drive cccccsecscsscsecsesecseeseteesees 6 45 UMOOR A EE E E EE 2 65 Rear Axle Front Axle ccccsecsnesgssetberiwvansdeevessgesdeeteacans 6 47 Headlamp Aiming oo eee eee ee cece cence cence een es 6 48 Bulb Replacement cc cc ccccec cess eee ee eee 6 51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 6 54 TOS haeevesssaveessucgiveveesavivessieeveceasueviweeeiws 6 56 Appearance Care oo eeeeeecceeceeeneceeeeeaeeeeenes 6 96 Vehicle Identification eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 104 Electrical System oo ee eececceeceeceeceeeeeeaeeees 6 105 Capacities and Specifications eee 6 113 Maintenance Schedule cecseesseeseeseeeeees 7 1 Maintenance Schedule ce eee cece eeeee eee 7 2 Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Customer Assistance and Information _ 8 2 Reporting Safety Defects eee 8 14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 8 16 WOK ELETEN PEE T E E EEE E A 1 GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CADILLAC the CADILLAC Crest amp Wreath and the names ESCALADE and ESV are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes
287. eeee es 5 57 Transmission Fluid Automatic ccccceee eee eee eee eeeeeeeaees 6 20 Transmission Operation Automatic 5 2 29 Transportation Program Courtesy 6 eeeeee 8 10 Tip OGOMEIER reiii nii 3 35 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0 eeeeeeees 3 8 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever eeeeeeeeeeee ee 3 7 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA 2 42 Uniform Tire Quality Grading s c e 6 73 Universal Home Remote System 0 2 55 OperatiOn sssercetseeaeea ade patee aiie 2 55 Vehicle COMMON otea A a E E A 5 3 orte iato E E T 5 33 Remote Start a c t dia adie ohne 2 8 Running While Parked ce ceeeeeeeeeee eee es 2 39 Symbol arise o ESA iv Vehicle Customization DIC cccceee cece ees 3 65 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 4 8 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eea een eenes 6 104 Service Parts Identification Label 6 105 Vehicle Positioning 2 sisacetnaceacecad etanacckceceseneeass 4 60 Ventilation Adjustment cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 3 31 VIS OMS coy viens acon dednindaar a E E emtaenohaue vee kod 2 20 Voice Recognition cececeeeeeeeee seers eeeeeeees 4 86 15 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 33 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 6eeeeeeee 3 56 Hazard Flashers eenias n a
288. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 8 6 OMCES iat dc scat Mictasnte meshed inate hatiattant gees 8 6 Text Telephone TTY Users snsc 8 6 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 6 eeeeeee 8 2 Damage Repair Collision cceeeeeeeeee eee 8 12 Data Recorders VOM visti alot E E E 8 17 Database Coverage Explanations 000 4 62 Daytime Running Lamps DRL eee 3 21 Defensive Driving cceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenenees 5 2 Delayed LOCKING i nessss idnina aanas minini 2 10 DIC COmpag Sararen a an iana 3 53 Doing Your Own Service Work ssssseesecececerseeees 6 4 Dome Lamp Override ceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 23 Dome Lamps cc c ceaccagectes cee tec etnawsdeteaenetielatinn 3 23 Door Delayed LOCKING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneee 2 10 LOCKS isc ealon nrd aes Ea E Ea elses 2 10 POW6r LOCKS crrr eea 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS c eeeeeeeeee ees 2 11 Drive Systems E All Wheel Drive cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 45 Driver Information Center DIC c eceeee eee 3 47 E85 Fue sicisisacescacs cect taliteseesusdseckadeestddedetevoeaads 6 7 DIC Operation and Displays cceeeeees 3 48 EDR acscecssstenstaiteois tadduslautenesaeincaadac EE 8 16 DIC Vehicle Customization cccceee
289. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 31 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 00 3 8 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Rda A AE EE E EE AAE EE EAE E and Electronic Climate Controls 3 32 a IT Wipers Be ee de 3 10 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 33 Windshield Washer o n ONT SE Panel St orien ee ere oe Rear Window Wiper Washer 0ceeeeeeeee 3 12 began and Odometer s sesereeees ae Cruise COMUOl sa ereere inani RRE 3 13 Ta iomele G astaontedt minininu iai niania ee Aocdemes en nioe ao Safety Bel Romine cee ote cca 3 35 Daytime Running Lamps DRL EEEE EA 3 21 Piee alg ie mate s indicat ee ee ae Automatic Headlamp System ccccee 3 21 E lt cten Light MEAS AU anien ees 5g a Brightness a eet t ney y Brake System Warning Light eeeee 3 39 Dome Lamps cccccccseseseseeesveseseseeveseseseseeeesees 3 23 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 40 Dome Lamp Ove de e a kn A 3 23 StabiliTrak Indicator Light 0000 3 40 Entry Lighting cc cccccssscscesesesseseseseseseesesees 3 23 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 5 3 41 Exit Lighting 0c0cccccscscsceseseeseseeseseseeseseeseees 3 23 Tire Pressure Light cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeee trees 3 41 Reading Lamps 524 Malfunotion Indicator Lamp 1 1111 3 42 Electric Power Management i 3 24 Oil Pressure Light cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 44 Sectio
290. eeeeeeeneceee annsa 2 12 LiftglaSs LIMQ ate st sccsecie ce atacsaceas nna 2 12 Lighting EAI eion cuntwdaiel E 3 23 EXI a eeo e aa n E ES 3 23 LED piirteinen a AEE A A REN E ES 6 51 Lights Airbag Readiness ccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 40 Brake System Warning eseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 39 Charging System cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 3 38 Cruise Control ccceeeceeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeaee 3 46 Exterior Pam pS eenen nne ia EaD 3 16 Lights cont Flash to Pass merenan neat 3 9 Fog Lamps sccc2sitentses et aA Sosa ieee E ose 3 45 Highbeam Oni s sisian miari anaa aE E iA 3 46 High Low Beam Changer ssssesserserrerrersenn 3 8 Lights On Reminder eseeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 3 45 Oil PreSSUre 0 0 cece cec cece eee eee tniii 3 44 Oni Reminder sv 2is cszevencevoedesetivietistaeeeed scene 3 21 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 37 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 35 S CUMLY aversier assu iOa EE EIEN 3 45 StabiliTrak Indicator ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 40 Tire PROSSUNE avi vecccctennck tonckaendas usb daneaeeeneaeontan 3 41 Tow Haul Mode issii miessen ae ane 3 46 Loading Your Vehicle cceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeens 5 33 Locking Rear Axle cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee 5 9 Locks Delayed LOckING sicc c dsecties tet desc sesetewsdednue 2 10 DOOR
291. eees 3 65 Electrical Equipment DIC Warnings and Messages 0008e0 3 56 Add On Equipment 0 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 105 Driving Electrical System At NIGW reisa ieee enya eee es ee 5 25 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 6 108 Before a Long Trip cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 27 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ccsee 6 106 Better Fuel Economy 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 0008 6 106 DefGASiIVG scsicc25 risbesindeteslsdaheiacscataneesiboesie aes 5 2 Power Windows and Other Power Options 6 105 DUNK css ones fate atin a e E E 5 3 Underhood Fuse Block cracens 6 109 Highway Hypnosis 0eceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 27 Windshield Wiper Fuses 0eeeeeeees 6 105 Hill and Mountain Roads ccccecceeeeeeeeees 5 28 Electronic Immobilizer In Rain and on Wet Roads cccccceceecceseuees 5 26 PASS Key WF cscee scdudcrestedseteteiee Sbscadeceedesess 2 22 Eossof Control 2cc2c sicccccsstostivaniaadin ciaeieartaanes 5 12 Electronic Immobilizer Operation SG e E EE E sess 5 13 PASS Wey UG ccsnzentscscemarsinaceaebertineroamt 2 23 Off Road Recovery cccccecceeecaeeeeeeeneeenees 5 11 Engine Recovery Hooks 0 0cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 32 Air Cleaner Filter ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaes 6 19 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 32 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp
292. eering column to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press again to turn the flashers off When the hazard warning flashers are on the vehicle s turn signals will not work Horn To sound the horn press the center pad on the steering wheel Tilt Wheel The power tilt wheel control is located on the left side of the steering column Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down To set the memory position see Memory Features on page 1 7 Heated Steering Wheel For vehicles with a heated steering wheel the button for this feature is located on the steering wheel amp Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off A light on the button displays when the feature is turned on The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating Turn Signal Multifunction Lever W Windshield Wipers Windshield Washer XJ Rear Wiper Delay MJ Rear Wiper QJ Rear Wiper Wash Flash to Pass Feature Information for these features is on the pages following The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn Raise or lower the leve
293. elect this button to view the list and select a city Once a city has been selected the Street name category is automatically selected for entry If five or less streets are available for the selected city the system displays the list of streets If more than five streets are available the system displays the alpha keyboard Start entering the street name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This button represents the number of available streets Select this button to view the list and select a street Once a street has been selected select the House screen button to enter the house number The system displays the house number range that is available for the street 11 Select the Go screen button A map screen with the destination marked appears 12 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 13 Select the Start Guidance screen button You are now ready to start your route See Address Entry under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Entering a Point of Interest POI To set a destination by entering a Point of Interest POI do the following 1 If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted skip to Step 5 2 Press b to turn the system on 3 Insert the DVD map disc See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more
294. eliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e are driven off road in the recommended manner See Off Road Driving on page 5 13 e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 6 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 7 6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 7 8 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 6 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equip
295. ems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 6 71 and Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires availa
296. ening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag e Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts e The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 8 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 8 17 e Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The pas
297. ennn 6 77 Flat Tire Changing siseseid eidi 6 78 Flat Tire Storing cccceeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 92 Fluid Automatic Transmission ccccceseeeeeeeeeees 6 20 Power Steering cceceeeeeeeteneeeeeaeeaeeneeeeee 6 33 Windshield Washer cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 34 Fog Lamps Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 Eel ni A A EE EE AT 3 45 O AAE itd dacthi dics aaameassacames 6 47 PUGH cts cer E A E A 6 5 Additive S ei retesni esr draaie innare 6 6 C litornia Fuel okes renees aea i 6 6 E85 85 Ethanol cccececeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 6 7 Economy Driving sessies enrera tanemi 5 2 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 05 6 11 Filing the Tank sereine kees 6 9 Fuels in Foreign Countries ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 8 GAJE rona aE e OE a 3 46 Gasoline Octane ccc ccccc ec ec ee eeeeeeneaeaeeenees 6 5 Gasoline Specifications ceeeeeeeeeeee teers 6 6 Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block 6 108 Fuses and Circuit Breakers c0cceeeee 6 106 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 00068 6 106 Underhood Fuse Block ccceceeeeeeeee ees 6 109 Windshield Wiper eeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 105 G Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 0eeeeeeeee 3 41 FUGL ccncicancdoarcas eda ydns ju alaen a Ta EEO 3 46 Speedometer ieser eie aneii 3 35 Tachometer snoren ennn e an
298. ep 4 Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2 in order from left to right into the Universal Home Remote when completing Step 4 From inside your vehicle first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode 2 59 5 After entering all of the switch positions again firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time The indicator lights will turn on 6 Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds 7 Immediately release the button when the garage door moves The indicator light will blink rapidly Middle Right until programming is complete o 8 Press and release the same button again Nauta Off The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful and complete 4 The indicator lights will blink slowly Enter each To program another Fixed Code device such as an switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle s additional garage door opener a security device or Universal Home Remote You will have two and home automation device repeat Steps 1 8 choosing a one half minutes to complete Step 4 Now press different button in Step 6 than what was used for the one button on the Universal Home Remote for each
299. equipment The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 for more information Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones 3 75 Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent
300. er but the vehicle s acceleration could be slightly reduced and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise commonly referred to as spark knock If the octane is less than 87 you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible Otherwise you could damage the engine If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service 6 5 Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 6 6 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for d
301. er may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to m
302. er seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 88 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child ina forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied e The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat
303. ere is a problem with the battery charging system the DIC will display a message See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Oil Pressure This display will show the oil pressure in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 2 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 3 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds On vehicles with memory recall seats the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2 A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 4 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it 5 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone See DIC Compass on page 3 53 for more information Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass See DIC Compass on page 3 53 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center DI
304. es 2 36 Side Blind Zone Alert eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneee tenes 2 44 Signals Turn and Lane Change 005 3 8 Spare Tire soucia i 6 96 Installing cso wiieetinteiv eed Rae R 6 84 REMOVING saes a aa EERE 6 79 STONO insi tinain aane EE eE Ea AESA 6 92 Specifications and Capacities cceeeeee 6 113 Speedometer ccceeeeeeeceeeneeeeeneea een eeeeeaeeaes 3 35 Split Bench Seat 60 40 00 0 ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 1 11 StabiliTrak Indicator Light cccccssseseeees 3 40 StabiliTrak System ccccccccsssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 6 Start Vehicle Remote c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 2 8 Starting the Engine cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 2 26 SISCHING cs r E E RET 5 10 Steering Wheel Heated nrncciceida iaieeaddiciwunretaae aa eaae EE 3 6 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 0 3 115 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel 0 ceeeeeeeee 3 6 Steps Power ASSISE nieis enari nesana Enas 2 16 Storage Garment HOOKS sc rieunenni eia aa Eaa 2 63 13 Storage Areas Center Console cccccccccc cece eeeeeeeeeeneneneas 2 63 Cupholders sciicnesiatanere eris eR NEA is 2 62 Glove BOX uniin is ea i vzecided dtc cearedents 2 62 Luggage Carrier cccieeecceneesecetereeteeecenenecies 2 64 Reat cero a E A A E RENAN 2 65 Rear Seat Armrest ccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 65 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 008 5 31 Sun VI
305. es roll over Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand the wheels do not get good traction Acceleration is not as quick turning is more difficult and braking distances are longer It is best to use a low gear when in mud the deeper the mud the lower the gear In really deep mud keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck When driving on sand wheel traction changes On loosely packed sand such as on beaches or sand dunes the tires will tend to sink into the sand This affects steering accelerating and braking Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers 5 23 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it is very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if the vehicle does get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause it to slide out of control A CAUTION Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only 5 24 Driving in Water A CAUTION Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it is only shallow water it can
306. esired setting is displayed on the DIC EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature See Memory Features on page 1 7 for more information Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings DOOR BUTTON ONLY No automatic seat exit recall will occur The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button BUTTON AND KEY OUT default If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu the driver s seat will move back and if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel feature the power steering column will move up when the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit seat button The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition If the automatic movement has already occurred and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again the seat and steering column will stay in the original exit position unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain 3 71 To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EASY EXIT
307. et button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will
308. etailer This may not be available on all DVDs Aspect Touch this button to change the aspect ratio of the DVD This may not be available on all DVDs Next Track Chapter Press this hard key to go to the next track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews V Previous Track Chapter Press this hard key to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Tuning Knob Turn this knob counterclockwise one notch to go to the start of the current chapter track turn it again to go to the previous chapter track Turn this knob clockwise to go to the next chapter track 4 83 DVD Messages If Disc Read Error appears on the display and or the DVD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e lf adisc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format e If the disc is not from a correct region e If the map DVD disc was installed into the DVD audio video slot See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more information e It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the DVD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the DVD should play e The DVD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so
309. ets ind Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer air to the floor vents ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some to the windshield side window outlets and second row floor outlets In this mode the system automatically selects outside air hl Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield floor outlets and side window vents In this mode the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode QP Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents with some directed to the floor vents In this mode the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear 3 29 X Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning A C compressor on and off An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
310. etween the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the
311. ety from safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 458 8006 or write Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 In Canada call 1 888 446 2000 or write Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle
312. except on a level solid surface Many of the vehicle design features that help make the vehicle more responsive on paved roads during poor weather conditions also help make it better suited for off road use than conventional passenger vehicles The vehicle does not have features usually thought to be necessary for extended or severe off road use such as special underbody shielding and transfer case low gear range The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Off roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself When off road driving traffic lanes are not marked curves are not banked and there are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill or downhill Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover Off roading involves some new skills That
313. f Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel It controls the following systems e Headlamps e Taillamps e Parking Lamps e License Plate Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions O Off Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps DRL Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on For vehicles first sold in Canada the off position only works when the vehicle is shifted into the P Park position AUTO Automatic Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness together with the following e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps D0 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps ZD Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the following lamps listed below e Parking Lamps e Instrument Panel Lights e Taillamps e License Plate Lamps When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on the headlamps will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained Turn the headlamp control to off
314. f measurement selected 3 51 Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LEFT RIGHT If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service 3 52 Battery Voltage This display shows the current battery voltage If the voltage is in the normal range the value will display For example the display may read BATTERY VOLTAGE 13 2 VOLTS If the voltage is low the display will show LOW If the voltage is high the display will show HIGH Your vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC This is normal See Charging System Light on page 3 38 for more information If th
315. f the airbags or AACN system deploy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle 2 54 was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone
316. f the feature defaults in the setup menus If a feature is not supported the defaults are provided by the DVD media 3 105 To set the language for the OSD 1 Press the SETUP button on the remote control li To set the TV display Press the SETUP button on the remote control 2 Use the left right navigation arrows to navigate the 2 Use the left right navigation arrows to navigate the General Setup Page then use the down navigation arrow to select the OSD language General Setup Page 3 Press the down navigation arrow to select TV Press the right navigation arrow and then use Display sub menu and to adjust the screen setting the up down eta arrows to select English 4 Press the right navigation arrow and then use the French or Spanish up down navigation arrows to select a display option The display options are fe an aD a La x e Normal PS Pan and Scan This displays the General Setup Page wide picture on the screen with a portion of TV Display PS the left and right sides removed Angle Mark On e Normal LB Letter Box This displays the wide Oo N English picture with black bands on the upper and Captions On French lower portions of the screen Screen Saver On sh e Wide 16 9 This option is chosen if the video Last Memory On screen panel is wide screen 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the Set OSD Language Spanish ee 3 106 Preference me
317. fensive Driving eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneees 5 2 Drunk Driving issiencsciereaccene dee cancheaedamieesawemeisness 5 3 Control of a Vehicle ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 5 3 Braking anesse e E cas 5 4 Antilock Brake System ABS i c 5 5 Braking in Emergencies ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 6 StabiliTrak System airesin esinaine 5 6 Magnetic Ride Control 0 ee 5 9 Road Sensing Suspension sceeeeeeneeeeeees 5 9 Locking Rear Axle c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 9 All Wheel Drive AWD System n 5 9 DICCMING arimo naai Anaa ERA ANCA EEA i 5 10 Off Road Recovery ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 5 11 Passing ni a EE Ea 5 12 Loss of Controls cccec ce eddeee teste i onena nera 5 12 Off Road Driving as iessess icasi inoseni ennienni niania 5 13 Driving Your Vehicle Driving at INIQMG ecccctevetactnot arenrinwincanesstacsnenes 5 25 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 5 26 Before Leaving on a Long Trip e 5 27 Highway Hypnosis ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 5 27 Hill and Mountain Roads ceeeeeeeeeee eee 5 28 Winter DIVINO orisati e 5 29 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud lce OF SNOW 20 0 cece ccc ec cence eeee ee eeeeeaeeeaeeeeeees 5 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 5 32 Recovery Hooks iscectuis vente a 5 32 Loading the Vehicle w ncsecgscceeeseeseentewderenenes 5 33 TOWING
318. ff some DVD Map Disc noise is normal Keeping your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive is important for safe driving The navigation system has built in features intended to help keep your eyes on the road and mind on the drive Some features may be disabled while driving Note that these functions will be grayed out A grayed out function indicates it is not available when the vehicle is moving All functions are available when the vehicle is parked Do the following before driving e Become familiar with the navigation system operation hard keys on the faceplate and touch sensitive screen buttons of the navigation system e Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers e Set up the navigation features before beginning driving such as entering an address or a preset destination e Set up your phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily with the press of a single button or a single voice command for navigation systems equipped with phone capability A CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often while using the navigation system could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Focus your attention on driving A CAUTION Avoid looking too long or too often at the moving map on the navigation screen This could cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Use the turn by turn voice guidance directions
319. ffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven ona freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving Fuel range cannot be reset 3 49 Average Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVERAGE ECONOMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset AVERAGE ECONOMY press and hold the set reset button Fuel Used Press the trip fuel button until FUEL USED displays This display shows the number of gallons gal or liters L of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item To reset the fuel used information press and hold the set reset button while FUEL USED is displayed Timer Press the trip fuel button until TIMER displays This display can be used as a timer To start the timer press the set reset button while TIMER is displayed The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to 3 50 be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will re
320. flowing into the passenger area Press the button for warmer air and press the button for cooler air M Air Delivery Mode Control Press the mode button to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous 3 33 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let show how the vehicle is running It shows how fast the vehicle is going about how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safel
321. followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone press amp for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready follow
322. forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal The headphones automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly Headphones should be worn with headband over the top of the head for best audio reception The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set See your dealer retailer for more information Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If
323. fuel E85 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www eere energy gov afdc infrastructure locator html that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85 Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on To ensure quick starts in the wintertime the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E85 it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it
324. g at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include e Drive defensively e Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror e Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead e Watch for animals e When tired pull off the road e Do not wear sunglasses e Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps e Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out e Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old 5 25 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake p
325. g to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial lt name tag gt Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two con
326. gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load If your vehicle has P265 65R18 or P285 45R22 size tires and you will be driving at high speeds speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher set the cold inflation pressure to 3 psi 20 kPa above the recommended tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information Label When you end this high speed dr
327. garage door opener switch setting as follows e lf you wrote Left press the left button in the vehicle e If you wrote Right press the right button in the vehicle e If you wrote Middle press the middle button in the vehicle 2 60 Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by repeating the instructions Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons The programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device 1 Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights located directly above the buttons begin to blink rapidly 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release both buttons The codes from all buttons will be erased For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8 6 2 61 Storage Areas Glove Box Pull the bottom of the glove box handle upward to open it Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box Cupholders Cupholders are located in the center console for the front passengers Press down on the acce
328. gibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners General Motors Participation in the Mediation Arbitration Program In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after the following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge mediation Arbitration program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to the Mediation Arbitration Program at the following address Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1
329. gin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake e To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only e To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut Service Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear corrosion cracks loss of lubricant or other damage Check the hold open ability of gas strut If necessary replace with genuine parts from your dealer retailer Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Usage Fluid Lubricant The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard can be identified as synthetic and should also be identified with the American Petroleum Institute API Certified for Gaso
330. h arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 106 lf the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key III to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key Ill decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key IIl to have keys made and programmed to the system 2 23 See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can serv
331. h your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 6 71 e Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key 6 67 You have two minutes to match the fi
332. hat there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Overhead Console Buttons shown Panel Button similar When accessing the third row seats if your vehicle has them from the outside of the vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked A CAUTION A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide t
333. have a leak in the cooling system 6 27 How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill A CAUTION procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling damaged system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 6 28 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as follows 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is stil
334. he chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 1 54 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle 1 55 A CAUTION Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to c
335. he information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 and DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for the displays available 3 47 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected A digital soeedometer also appears at the bottom of the DIC display The digital soeedometer can be enabled or disabled See DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information customization and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages 3 48 ZN Trip Fuel Press this button to display the odometer trip odometer fuel range average economy fuel used timer and transmission temperature The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display The temperature will be shown in F or C depending on the units selected i Vehicle Information Press this button to display the oil life units side blind zone system on off tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter programming compass zone setting and compass
336. he protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted 3 Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating position is not caught between the two seats and is not twisted Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors Driver s Side Rear Panel Button shown One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Bucket Seats Second Row
337. he range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 for additional information Q Remote Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button The vehicle s doors will lock Immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash If you cannot see the vehicle s lights press and hold the remote start button for two to four seconds Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn the engine off When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat these steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle To manually shut off a remote start do any of the following e Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start but
338. he rig on a flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If the engine has been left running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when on fairly level ground always put the shift lever fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you e Start the engine e Shift into a gear e Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks 5 55 Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engi
339. he spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle 6 82 Once the retainer is separated from the pin tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and latch 9 Put the spare tire near the flat tire 8 Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire wheel retainer G Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch 6 83 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 78 for more information 2 To remove the center cap place the chiseled end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out Jacking Locations Overall View A Front Position B Rear Position 3 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts Do not remove the wheel nuts yet 6 84 A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fi
340. he way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 When replacing the fuel cap insert the tether in its hole before tightening the cap Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC the Filling a Portable Fuel Container TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel A CAUTION cap is not properly installed A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others e Dispense fuel only into approved containers If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately e Do not fill a container while it is inside a Notice If you need a new f
341. hen pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic e When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired 5 51 Operating the vehicle in Tow Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage However there is no benefit to the selection of Tow Haul when the vehicle is unloaded Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy Tow Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load The vehicle is equipped with Autoride which further improves the vehicle s ride while towing See Autoride on page 5 44 for more information Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2 000 Ibs 900 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle s hydraulic system 5 52 Driving with a Trailer A CAUTION When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engi
342. hen you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into Cruise Control shown with Heated Steering Wheel Button If Equipped MTIR REOS cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise steering wheel control switch off until you want to use cruise control The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the Y On Off Turns the system on or off The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off 1 Press the button RES Resume Accelerate Press to make the 2 Get up to the desired speed vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed 3 Press the SET button located on the steering wheel and release it SET Set Coast Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate 4 Take your foot off the accelerator 3 14 Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied this shuts off the cruise control But it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on the steering wheel The vehicle returns to the previously set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached then release it e To increase vehicle
343. hicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 21 Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are 9 in use The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 22 for more information Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on See Exterior Lamps on page 3 16 for more information 3 45 Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the d cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 13 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information 3 46 Tow Haul Mode
344. his button to switch between dual screen and full screen which displays the entire route Auto Reroute When a destination is set but is off the planned route the system automatically plans a new route and begins to reroute The new route is highlighted on the screen Destination Press the DEST key to access the Destination Entry screen From this screen you can select from several options to plan a route by entering destination points Address Book Previous Destination To enter a destination choose from one of the following destination entry methods Address Entry Address Entry Enter either a city or street to use the address entry destination method 4 25 ene _ 2101 Last Praia To enter a destination by inputting the city name first 1 Press the DEST hard key 2 Select the screen button 3 Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province 4 26 4 Once a state or province has been selected the City name category is automatically selected for entry Enter the City Name or touch the Last 5 Cities screen button The Last 5 Cities screen displays a list of the last five city names that had been entered Select a city from the list and it appears in the City name area If using the alpha keyboard finish entering the city name If five or less name
345. ht is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service 3 39 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for all brake related DIC messages 3 40 StabiliTrak Indicator Light The StabiliTrak indicator light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally th
346. hten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger e A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver e A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger The vehicle may have the following airbags e If your vehicle has a third row seat it will have third row roof rail airbags All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steeri
347. iagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing
348. iary sources such as portable DVD players game stations or video cameras on each screen e Video Input The yellow connector is used for video input e L Audio The white connector is used for the left side audio e R Audio The red connector is used for the right side audio Level Lock and Release Latch The viewing angle of the video screen can be adjusted by releasing the latch and gently moving the screen Then lock it into a secure position 3 100 Vehicle Speakers Audio from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can be heard through the vehicle speakers or the wireless wired headphones while the radio is tuned to one of the six frequencies selected on the Sound Around portion of the system s remote control See Remote Control later in this supplement Only one audio source can be heard through the vehicle s speakers at a time The audio source being used is specified by the A V audio video source selected on the driver side head restraint video display screen To turn the RSE system audio output to the vehicle s speakers press Sound Around ON on the system s remote control The audio from the RSE system can be heard through the wireless wired headphones and the vehicle s speakers at the same time The volume on the radio can vary when switching between the radio CD DVD MP3 or an auxiliary device Wireless Headphones The two wireless headphones included with the Headrest DVD RS
349. ic showing through the tire s rubber e The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric e The tire has a bump bulge or split e The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including bra
350. ice PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new additional key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of turning the ignition to the LOCK OFF position in Step 3 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage your PASS Key Ill key see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle 2 24 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines e Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle e Avoid making hard sto
351. icle ccceeeeeeee eee ee eee 6 100 Appearance Care cont WealhersillpS wario nanara 6 100 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades 6 102 Wood Panels eiiscis secacssssietesest wesisese nint 6 100 ASh AY cinteiisncnncletivcmssieagerees inc neiacadenertameeaty 3 26 Assist Handles ciaeo ers F 2 63 Audio System 2 2 cee cee eee eee eee eee eee eee een eee eeneenees 3 75 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 06 3 115 Radio sucen eraa a a E 4 62 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 117 Audio Systems R dio Reception saires 3 116 Rear Seat RSA siciisicsie oriiaerensin sisa 3 113 Theft Deterrent Feature 2 eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 115 Automatic Headlamp System eeeeeeeees 3 21 Automatic Transmission PUIG EAT EEE E aacemreat ate ceneecameane senate 6 20 Operation enecens sn EE R E 2 29 AUtoride 00 0 ccc ccccecececceeeeeeeeeeeseeetteereeeeeteeeees 5 44 Axle REAR serdara a E E 6 46 B Back Up Lamps Ambulance Body Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 51 Battery 2 ciccd2Senssinsdnodecamcides ies ea gee n Ei 6 39 Electric Power Management eeeeeee 3 24 Run Down Protection s eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 25 Belt Routing Engine cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 16 Bench Seat Split 60 40 ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 1 11 BIUCtOOtN auon iienaa ea Ea iaraa tends 3 75 Brake Emergencies sasni 5 6 Pedal and Adjustable
352. icle warranty Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground Two wheel drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed Dolly Towing Rear Wheels Off the Ground Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a two wheel drive vehicle from the rear 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 34 4 Put the transmission in P Park 5 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 6 Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position 7 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on light duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride suspension if equipped This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to ON RUN and will automatically adjust vehic
353. iding increased performance vehicle control and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to turn the tow haul on or off When the tow haul is on a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 3 46 for more information Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 for more information The tow haul mode works with the Autoride feature if the vehicle has this to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle See Autoride on page 5 44 Grade Braking The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever While in Range Selection Mode Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears Grade Braking is only active while the Tow Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode See Tow Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 29 for more information on the Range Selection Mode Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and transmission to slow the vehicle This reduces wear on the braking system and increases control of the vehicle Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed acceleration engine torque and brake pedal usage Using this i
354. ight distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches under Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Service on page 8 7 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following 5 40 Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing e What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations e What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow e Is the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations e Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the
355. ill not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The brakes might vibrate or some noise might be heard but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak It is an advanced computer controlled system that assi
356. in To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 68 DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice See Delayed Locking on page 2 10 for more information Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want
357. information appears on the display See Radio Menu later in this section to add and remove XM categories from the category list Removed categories do not appear on the category list screen or when the right and left arrow category screen buttons are used FM lists may also contain a category to select if stations in the broadcast area support Radio Data Systems RDS Refresh List Touch to refresh the list of AM or FM stations When viewing a map screen the name of the station or channel displays K Bl V Seek To seek stations press the up or down arrows to go to the next or previous station To scan stations press and hold either arrow for more than two seconds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station To stop scanning press either arrow again Storing Radio Station Presets This feature stores a mix of up to 30 AM FM and XM if equipped preset stations To store presets 1 Press D to turn the system on 2 If viewing a map screen touch the source screen button press the AUDIO key or press the FAV favorite key 3 Select the band 4 Seek scan or tune to the desired station to select the station 5 Press and hold one of the preset screen buttons for more than two seconds or until a beep is heard 6 Repeat the steps for each preset 4 65 Sound Menu Display al EN Diver Rear 2 Sound Press this key or pres
358. ing brake is firmly set After the shift lever is moved into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pulling it toward you If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle can put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission It might be difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park on page 2 36 When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before releasing the parking brake If torque lock does occur you might need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission Then you should be able to pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to e Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and e Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal i
359. install the air dam 1 Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps 2 Install the two outboard bolts Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road There are some important things to remember about Driving how to load your vehicle e The heaviest things should be on the floor forward of the rear axle Put heavier items as far forward A CAUTION cea e Be sure the load is properly secured so things are not tossed around e Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 and Tires on page 6 56 tossed about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns We recognize these concerns and urge every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment
360. into the navigation system The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the navigation system the Rear Seat Audio RSA system and the remote control The DVD player can also be used for the rear seat passengers with the radio off The rear seat passengers can power on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the disc See Rear Seat Entertainment System in the Index of your vehicle s owner manual for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats 4 78 9 If an error appears on the display see DVD Messages later in this section Load To load one disc do the following 1 Press the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed 2 When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it into the first available slot and start playing The system will display the type of disc inserted To load multiple discs do the following 1 Press and hold the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed 2 When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it in 3 Once a disc is loaded the system wi
361. ion device repeat Steps 1 through 5 choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what was used for the garage door opener If these instructions do not work the garage door opener is probably a Fixed Code unit Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener Programming Universal Home Remote Fixed Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System call 1 866 572 2728 or go to learcar2u com Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units Programming a garage door opener involves time sensitive actions so read the entire procedure before starting Otherwise the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated 2 57 To program up to three devices The garage door opener receiver motor head unit could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different or if the dip switch settings are different use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program the Universal Home Remote The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when the original hand held transmitter is not available 1234567 89 1011 le IN CTS 206 12 Tl24 1 To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit remove the battery cover on the hand held transmitter supplied by the m
362. ion location and information on the map Full Map FM 104 3 a re e A M14 Beck Rd 11 5mi lt gt US23 North Exit 13 25 3mi 1 Telegraph Rd at Maple Rd 30 6mi les VanDyke at Mound 36 7mi La 9 Mile Rd at Green Rd 55 7mi 1 Press the NAV key then press the NAV key repeatedly until Traffic is selected or touch the Traffic screen button A list of traffic conditions with distance from the vehicle s current position displays An arrow may appear before the distance The arrow indicates the distance is a straight line distance and it shows the direction of the event from the current vehicle s position If no arrow appears the distance indicates how far the event is ahead on current Interstate highway or route 4 51 While the vehicle is moving the traffic list up or down Options scroll arrows are limited to a maximum of four pages No more than four pages of traffic events may be viewed while the vehicle is moving Traffic Options bls ALI Alert for Approaching Traffic Events If not in Route Guidance Events on Expressway Only If in Route Guidance Events on Route Only 2 Select a traffic condition to get more detailed information of the event Select the Options screen button A Traffic Options menu displays Select the desired traffic related option Traffic Select to enable or disable the traffic function Show Traffic ICONS Select to display traffic icons
363. ipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM4718M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER e GM4718M This vehicle s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic However not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M Notice Using oils that do not have the GM4718M Standard designation can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty e SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 e American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API This vehicle s engine was filled at the factory with a Mobil 1 synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle Substitute Engine Oil When adding oil to maintain engine oil level oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not be available You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W 30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures
364. ires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often 5 27 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include e Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape e Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear A CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope 5 28 A CAUTION Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine ru
365. is A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle 1 38 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests 1 39 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 40 Q What is
366. is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system 3 88 Headphones The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system Channel 1 is dedicated to the DVD player while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs radio any auxiliary source connected to A V jacks or the auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature The wireless headphones have an On Off button channel 1 2 switch and a volume control If the vehicle has a third row video screen display it has two additional headphones Push the power button to turn on the headphones An indicator light located on the headphones comes on If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound and or static on the headphones or if the indicator light does not come on the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use The infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and the RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than 3 minutes If you move too far
367. is on do the following 1 Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock using the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if the vehicle has one 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open If the driver s side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the driver s door will unlock If the passenger s side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger s door is open and the key is in the ignition all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger s door will unlock Liftgate Liftglass A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate e Make sure all other windows are shut e Turn the fan on your heating
368. is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading e Have all necessary maintenance and service work done e Make sure there is enough fuel that fluid levels are where they should be and that the spare tire if the vehicle has one is fully inflated e Be sure to read all the information about all wheel drive vehicles in this manual e Make sure all underbody shields if the vehicle has them are properly attached e Know the local laws that apply to off roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area e Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle you can remove the front fascia lower air dam The air dam is held in place by two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the front fascia To remove the air dam 1 Remove the two outboard air dam bolts 2 With a flat blade tool disengage the snaps 3 After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged push forward on the air dam until it is free Notice Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off road driving After off roading be sure to re
369. isplays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error Displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted Displays if no disc is present when 4 or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage can result Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Headrest DVD Vehicles with an RSE system include two head restraint video display screens with integrated DVD players auxiliary inputs two wireless headphones and a remote control This system works independently from the vehicle s Overhead DVD RSE system See the vehicle s owners manual for information about the Overhead DVD RSE system The vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the RSE system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessor
370. istribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 70
371. it between the audio screen and the map screen If you do not want to view a split screen or you are not on a map screen press the AUDIO key then press the AUDIO key repeatedly until CD is selected or touch the CD screen button Load To load one disc do the following 1 Press the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed 2 When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it into the first available slot and start playing The system will display the type of disc inserted 4 71 To load multiple discs do the following 1 2 Press and hold the load hard key and follow the screen message displayed When the system displays Insert Disc number insert the disc partway into the slot label side up The system will pull it in Once a disc is loaded the system will display Insert Disc number again Load the next disc Repeat this procedure for each disc The player takes up to six discs do not try to load more than six The system does not display the disc types when loading all until the discs have been read by the system S Eject To eject a disc do the following 1 Press the eject hard key 2 The system displays Ejecting Disc Press the DISC screen button to display the Disc Changer screen Select the disc to eject Ifa selection is not made the system will eject the disc from the c
372. ition If it is dark outside the headlamps will remain on Notice Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision SY Washer Fluid There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed 4 Heated Windshield Washer For vehicles with this feature the button is located in the switchbank under the climate controls Press while the ignition is turned on to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system This activation will initiate four heated wash wipe cycles The first heated wash wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur depending on outside temperature After the first wash wipe cycle it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wash wipe cycles have been completed When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outside temperature conditions steam may flow out of the washer nozzles fo
373. ition and the direction the vehicle is traveling on the map The destination symbol appears on the map after a route has been planned marking the final destination The stopover symbol displays on the map after a stopover has been added to the route The stopover symbols are numbered one through three depending on how many stopovers have been set DQ 2 The distance to destination symbol indicates the distance to the final destination This symbol appears when the time to the destination is not available or while you are scrolling on the map The distance and time to destination symbol indicates the distance and the estimated time remaining to the final destination depending on the option selected The straight line to distance symbol indicates the straight line distance to the destination This symbol appears before you start driving on the route or if on a road where navigation guidance cannot be given 4 20 The north up symbol indicates the map with North Up known as North Up mode While in North Up mode the vehicle icon follows the north direction on the map regardless of which direction the vehicle is traveling Select this screen symbol to switch between North Up Heading Up and 3 D view modes The shaded triangle indicates the North direction While in Heading Up mode the direction at the top of the screen and the way the vehicle icon is heading indicates the direction the vehic
374. itioning system the fans can change to high speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly The fans change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 14 for reservoir location 6 33 When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the FULL COLD mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark 6 34 What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page
375. iving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 6 63 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicl
376. ke system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6 57 for additional information 6 71 GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 for information on proper tire rotation A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle might not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types could also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size brand and type tires on all wheels Your vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires those originally installed on your vehicle When new your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle s road tires and wheels so it is all right to drive on it Because this spare was developed for use on your vehicle
377. l provide more firmness from the shock absorbers This added control gives better ride and handling when carrying heavy loads or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 for more information Road Sensing Suspension The Road Sensing Suspension RSS feature provides superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride RSS also interacts with the tow haul mode that when engaged will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when traction is low this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD System If the vehicle has this feature engine power is sent to all four wheels when extra traction is needed This is like four wheel drive but there is no separate lever or switch to eng
378. l some pressure left 2 Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark 6 29 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 6 30 5 Replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated 6 Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold If necessary repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6 Notice f the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 41 In addition ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and a ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver Information Center DIC on the instrument panel See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appea
379. lamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay If the vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See nstrument Panel Brightness on page 3 23 To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off turn the control to the off position The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the vehicle This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 The regular headlamp system can be turned on when needed 3 22 Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the control is located next to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column 40 Fog Lamps Press the button to turn the fog lamps on or off A indicator light comes on in the instrument panel cluster The ignition must be in the ON RUN position for the fog lamps to come on When the fog lamps are turned on the headlamps a
380. lamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on When it begins to get dark the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps To turn off the DRL lamps turn the exterior lamps control to the OFF position and then release For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the DRL lamps can be turned off Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim To turn off the automatic headlamp system turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release it For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must be in the P Park position before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on Do not cover the sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal 3 21 There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic head
381. layback where the disc stopped The play position memory is erased if the disc is removed STOP Ml Press once to stop playing a DVD There is a pre stop feature for DVD and video CD only This feature resumes playback of the disc where it was stopped Press the stop button once during disc playback and Il displays on the DVD startup screen This icon disappears after a few seconds Press the stop button a second time or eject the disc to cancel the pre stop feature and to clear the disc position memory SOURCE Press to select between Monitor 3 Monitor 4 or the AV INPUT Each video display screen can be adjusted independently as well as display information from both DVD players and both A V inputs Infrared Remote Sensor Located in the top center of the video display screen Do not block the signal from the remote to the sensor Infrared Transmitters Located in the top center of the video display screen Do not block the signal from the headphones to the transmitter Video Display Screen Located on the back of each headrest AV OUTPUT Audio Video Output Jack Located on the lower left side of the screen and is identified on the video screen panel as the AV OUTPUT 3 99 Headphone Jack Wired headphones can be plugged into the headphone jack with one eighth inch stereo plugs AV INPUT Audio Video Input Jack The audio video input jack is located below the video display screen and allows viewing of auxil
382. ld neutral pH soaps e Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery e Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior 6 97 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water 6 98 If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidde
383. le e My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing 1 800 833 CMCC 2622 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Cadillac the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P O Box 33169 Detroit MI 48232 5169 www Cadillac com 1 800 458 8006 1 800 833 2622 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 8 6 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 888 446 2000 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 882 1112 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local Gener
384. le height thereafter The system may exhaust lower vehicle height for up to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off You may hear the air compressor operating when the height is being adjusted If a weight distributing hitch is being used it is recommended to allow the shocks to inflate thereby leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch 5 43 Autoride With this feature improved vehicle ride and handling is provided under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed wheel to body position lift dive and steering position of the vehicle The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride Autoride also interacts with the tow haul mode that when activated will provide additional control of the shock absorbers This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer See Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 for more information 5 44 Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break in See New Vehicle Break In on page 2 24 for more information A CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the br
385. le is traveling Select this screen symbol to switch between Heading Up North Up and 3 D view modes The heading up symbol indicates that the vehicle is traveling up on the map and is known as Heading Up mode Three dimensional 3 D view mode changes the appearance of the map display to a road level view The No GPS symbol appears when the vehicle is acquiring or not receiving a Global Positioning System GPS satellite signal See Global Positioning System GPS on page 4 59 for more information The system automatically stores the point in the address book See Adding Destinations to the Address Book under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Select the Mark screen button to store the location on the screen in the address book Displaying Points of Interest POI on the Map Screen Select the POI screen button to display or delete POI icons from the map Displaying POI icons on the map shows where POls e g restaurants gas stations etc are located This screen appears after selecting the POI screen button 4 21 POI Close to 1 Once a category has been selected touch this button to display the list of available POls for the selected POI category The list provides the POI Show POI icons aes onen D Ee ay icon the name the direction and the distance to B Gas Station Parks Recreation the POI from the vehicle s current position Show POI icons nouo CA
386. le range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 23 Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedures described Consistency repeatable readings is important to maintaining proper fluid level If fluid is added it may take 15 minutes or longer to obtain an accurate reading because of residual fluid draining down the dipstick tube If inconsistent readings persist check the transmission breather to be sure it is clean and not clogged If readings are still inconsistent contact your dealer retailer 6 24 Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature A x are EN A Coolant Surge Tank B Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C Engine Cooling Fan s A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater cor
387. le to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen s The video screen s are located in the overhead console To use the video screen s 1 Push the release button located on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on this is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen The overhead console contains the IR infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information 3 91 Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight can also aff
388. lease the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with the parking brake symbol located above the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released the brake system warning light goes off Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 For vehicles without a release handle set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down then pushing down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive the brake system warning light will flash and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is s
389. lect the audio options that best improve sound quality This is not available on all DVDs or when the DVD is stopped This button is not available for DVD audio Subtitle Touch this button to playback the video with subtitles This is not available on all DVDs or when the DVD is stopped This button is not available for DVD audio Angle Touch this button to adjust the viewing angle of the DVD Repeatedly press this button to toggle through the angles This is not available on all DVDs or when the DVD is stopped This button is not available for DVD audio lt Previous Scene Press this button to go to the previous scene This button does not work when the DVD is stopped This button is not available for DVD video gt Next Scene Press this button to go to the next scene This button does not work when the DVD is stopped This button is not available for DVD video Search Touch this button to display the search screen Select Title or Chapter Search for DVD video and Group or Track for DVD audio The keyboard allows you to type in the title chapter group track number that you would like to watch or listen to This button does not work when the DVD is stopped Setup Touch this button to display the DVD Setup screen This button is only available when the DVD is not playing The DVD Setup screen allows you to change the brightness contrast and mode change the viewing on the monitor and to change the initial settings la
390. liary input with the RSA SRCE button 3 113 Oo Power Press the Oo button to turn RSA on and off Volume Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if the vehicle has these features DVD and rear auxiliary 3 114 K DI Seek When listening to FM AM or XM if equipped press either the left or right seek arrow to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio Press and hold either the left or right seek arrow until the display flashes to tune to an individual station The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio While listening to a disc press the right bl seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc Press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter if more than ten seconds have played This function is inactive with some radios if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc When a DVD video menu is being displayed press either the leftk
391. line Engines starburst symbol However not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM standard Look for and use only oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M For the proper viscosity see Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Oil 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 6 25 Engine Coolant Usage Fluid Lubricant DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid GM Part No U S 12377967 i Canada 89021320 R Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Power Steering Fluid GM Part No U S 89021184 1 Canada 89021186 DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Hydraulic Brake System Power Steering System Automatic Transmission Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 t Canada 10953474 Key Lock Cylinders Chassis Lubricant GM Part No U S 12377985 in Canada 88901242 or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Chassis Lubrication Usage Fluid Lubricant Front and Rear Axle Transfer Case Hood Hinges Body Door Hinge Pins Tailgate Hinge and Linkage Folding Seats and Fuel Door Hinge SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part No U S 12346241 Canada 10953474 Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube GM Part
392. lish Francais Espanol Italiano or Deutsch to change the default language that the DVD player uses for each disc The audio language must be available on the disc The audio language may vary for each DVD Subtitle Language Touch English Francais Espanol Italiano or Deutsch to change the default language of the subtitles that the DVD player uses for each disc The subtitle language must be available on the disc The subtitle language may vary for each DVD Menu Language Touch English Francais Espanol Italiano or Deutsch to change the default language of the DVD video menus The menu language must be available on the disc The menu language may vary for each DVD Parental Level Touch this button to change the rating level to only allow the play of DVDs with a certain rating The rating selection is 1 through 8 with 1 Kids Safe being a G rating If the 1 is selected any DVD with a rating above G will not be able to be viewed without entering a password When the parental level is first entered a keyboard will appear on the display and a four digit password will need to be created Type in a password that you will be able to remember Once the password is created you can then select a rating level If you would like to change the rating level press the Parental Level button then press the Password button Type in the password and then change the rating level If the password has been forgotten contact your dealer r
393. ll 1 877 438 9677 in Canada When XM is active the channel name and number song title and artist displays on the screen 4 69 XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels XL on the radio display after the channel name indicates content with explicit language These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required No XM signal The vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is processing audio and text data received No action is needed Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned No Artist Info No artist information is available The system is working properly 4 70 No Title Info No song title information is available The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM
394. ll come on if the dome override button is in the extended position If the dome override button is pressed in the lamps will not come on Exit Lighting The interior lamps come on when the key is removed from the ignition They turn off automatically in 20 seconds The lights do not come on if the dome override button is pressed in 3 23 Reading Lamps If the vehicle has reading lamps press the button located next to the lamp to turn it on or off The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations The lamps cannot be adjusted Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads 3 24 A
395. ll display Insert Disc number again Load the next disc Repeat this procedure for each disc The player takes up to six discs do not try to load more than six The system will not display the disc types when loading all until the discs have been read by the system Once all discs have been inserted the system will start playing the last loaded disc A Eject To eject a disc do the following 1 Press the eject hard key 2 The system will display Ejecting Disc Press the DISC screen button to display the Disc Changer screen Select the disc to eject If a selection is not made the system will eject the disc from the current slot If the disc is not removed from the slot the system will pull it back in after 10 seconds and start playing it To eject all discs at once press and hold the eject hard key The system will display the disc number being ejected Playing a DVD There are three ways to play a DVD e Once a DVD is inserted the system will automatically start play of the DVD e If you are on a map screen touch the DVD screen button e Press the AUDIO hard key then touch the DVD screen button When a DVD is loaded the rear seat passengers can power on the RSE video screen and use the remote control to navigate through the DVD DA Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn the knob to increase or decrease the volume of the audio system Press and hold this knob fo
396. ll such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 84 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts 1 85 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 85 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle 1 86 A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by op
397. llowing Perform the function Ask you to confirm your choice Issue an error message Did not recognize Voice Recognition Canceled e If you experience difficulty with the system recognizing a command try saying it more softly and wait for a few seconds after the beep or repeat the command e Background noise may cause voice commands to be misunderstood including airflow noise from wind e To use the voice recognition system the map DVD must be loaded and the navigation system must be on This system is able to recognize commands in three different languages The system only recognizes commands based on the language selected from the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information Voice Recognition Commands The following list shows all of the voice commands available for the navigation system with a brief description of each The commands are listed with the optional words in brackets To use the voice commands refer to the instructions listed previously Voice Tag Commands The following are voice tag commands that can be accessed by clearly stating the commands exactly as they are written There are up to 40 voice tag entries for destinations Navigation go to destination navigation select These commands instruct the system to select a destination saved under the voice tag you have stored The system prompts for a destination name then waits for you
398. llowing Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you
399. located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Ae Third Row Seat Three Passenger poe For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for either the third row center or driver side seating position Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached 1 67 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 67 for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual 1 68 A CAUTION Do
400. ls or OnStar Brake System Warning Light EA Charging System Cruise Control E Engine Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps 40 Fog Lamps D Fuel Gage Fuses Headlamp High Low Beam Changer LATCH System Child Restraints or Malfunction Indicator Lamp Vi Oil Pressure 2 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Power Q Remote Vehicle Start A Safety Belt Reminders Q Tire Pressure Monitor E Tow Haul Mode Traction Control Windshield Washer Fluid 42 NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints cccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Child Restraint Systems c eeeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 59 Front Seats o i ehcetcandeccctbescnaees aeeseeidea 1 3 Where to Put the Restraint s ssereeeereenene 1 61 Power Seats waeccccccs casasalesacels taie raie 1 3 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Power Lumbar cccccccceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Children LATCH ssceeesteteeeeeeteeeetees 1 63 Heated Seats cccccceeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Securing a Child Restraint in a Heated and Cooled Seats 000 cccecceeeeeeeeees 1 6 Rear Seat Position cccseeeeeeeen 1 71 Memory Features 0 cccccceeccccceseeeeeeeseneeees 1 7 Securing a Child Restraint in the Power Reclining Seatbacks 00ccccceseeeees 1 8 Center Front Seat Position ccceeeeees 1 75 Center Seat cccccccccc
401. lying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g Inspect system Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook up routing and condition Check that the purge valve works properly if equipped Replace as needed h Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 6 25 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed k f driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change I Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary m Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed clear and f
402. m 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Lift the lever located on the bottom rear of the second row seat on the inboard side to release the seatback The seatback will fold forward 3 Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor The seat will tumble forward 1 21 Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in P Park for this feature to work Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A CAUTION Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat could cause injury to the person sitting there Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 1 22 2 From the front seats press one of the automatic seat release buttons located on the overhead console Overhead Console Buttons sho
403. m and n Change transfer case fluid normal service See footnote m Inspect evaporative control system An Emission Control Service See footnotes t and g Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires An Emission Control Service Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote I Maintenance Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded Lubricate the front suspension steering linkage and parking brake cable guides Control arm ball joints are maintenance free a Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook
404. maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 5 5 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces 5 29 Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Service on page 8 7 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 e Tie ared cloth to an outside mirror A CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow e Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe e Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there CAUTION Continued 5 30 CAUTION Continued e Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of
405. mal the map disc should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the map disc should play The map disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer Ejecting the DVD Map Disc A DVD Map Disc Eject Press to eject the DVD map disc This button is located next to the upper disc slot Handling the DVD Map Disc When handling the DVD map disc be careful of the following e Handle the disc very carefully to avoid contamination or flaws Signals may not read out properly if the disc gets contaminated or flawed e If the disc gets soiled use a soft cloth to gently wipe it out from the center of the disc to the outside Do not use photographic record cleaner solvents or other cleaners e Do not use the disc to rest on while writing or drawing using any writing utensil or attach a seal to any of the sides or the disc e Do not keep the disc in direct sunlight high temperatures or humidity e After using the disc place it back into the original case Map Adjustments The system lets you adjust the scale of view on the map Also as you drive the map scrolls automatically based on the direction of travel Map Scales Zoom In Zoom Out Touch the zoom in or out screen buttons or the scale on the bar to change the level of map detail The scale appears on the screen once the zoom i
406. management system See Traction Control Operation next for more information When the traction control system has been turned off system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake traction control coming on It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off road conditions where high wheel spin is required See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 31 Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels engine speed management and by applying brakes to each individual wheel brake traction control as necessary The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started It will activate and the StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving If traction control is turned off only the brake traction control portion of traction control will work The engine speed management will be disabled In this mode engine power is not reduced automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely This can cause the brake traction control to activ
407. matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 70 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 70 and Wheel Replacement on page 6 75 When rotating your vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 6 69 Reset the Tire Pressure
408. may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 5 53 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions The tow haul mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often See Tow Haul Mode Light on page 3 46 When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 6 30 5 54 Parking on Hills A CAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park t
409. ment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts To purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 Owner Checks and Services on page 7 10 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 15 When the vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance To maintain the ride handling and performance of this vehicle it is important that the first tire rotation service be performed when the vehicle has 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km Check tires for inflation pressures and wear See Tires on page 6 56 Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 7 10 When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays service is required for the vehicle Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under
410. mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer retailer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment can interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even damage them The vehicle s systems can interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added Notice The chime signals related to safety belts parking brake and other functions of the vehicle operate through the navigation system If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to the vehicle the chimes may not work Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with the vehicle before installing it See Accessories and Modifications in the Index of the vehicle s owner manual Playing the Radio D Power Volume Press to turn the audio system on and off Turn to increase or to decrease the volume Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the navigation system the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE video screen and Rear Seat Audio RSA If the vehicle has not been turned off press this knob to turn RSE and RSA back on and to continue playback of the last active source gt gt Tuning Knob Turn to go to the next or previous frequency or disc track or chapter See CD Player on page 4 71 o
411. n 3 Instrument Panel Security Light esirinnas 3 45 Fog Lamp Light sicccccccncetcccctusdesvetecsul inean 3 45 Lights On Reminder seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 45 Cruise Control Light ssiiscnicriisene sinsanisreensi 3 46 Highbeam On Light e eee 3 46 Tow Haul Mode Light cc eeeeeeee eee eee ee es 3 46 FUG Gag ecccsttectncanedradesndgccshchwalaetediaedaneaet 3 46 Driver Information Center DIC 0 3 47 DIC Operation and Displays ceeeeeeeees 3 48 DIC COMPASS cdsccciediacmn tin veh dies eens 3 53 DIC Warnings and Messages e ceeeeeeeees 3 56 DIC Vehicle Customization eeeeeeeeee eres 3 65 Audio System s 0 cceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeen ees 3 75 BIUetooth oso dates esagaticdotsattie na sanacteaexeetenotkans 3 75 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Overhead acc cccdttatidoscceniacdacwecdanetoeadinciees 3 87 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System Headrest DVD 2 cciscacsccas cstheamehaecmstieaduc ase 3 97 Rear Seat Audio RSA ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 3 113 Theft Deterrent Feature ceeeeeeeeees 3 115 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 6655 3 115 Radio Reception esdire 3 116 Rear Side Window Antenna 6 000000 3 117 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 117 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview
412. n a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is ina crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space b
413. n addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 Side Blind Zone Alert If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this display allows the system to be turned on or off Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ON or OFF If you choose ON the system will be turned on If you choose OFF the system will be turned off When the SBZA system is turned off the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 and Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 44 for more information Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit o
414. n area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather TEHAMA Leather The leather surface on the seat was not designed to be aggressively cleaned using any commercial product Use a well wrung cloth dampened with water to remove dust Do not use a wet cloth or saturate the leather surface with water Allow the leather to dry naturally If a soil occurs that cannot be completely removed allow it to become part of the natural markings of the leather The leather in the vehicle was designed to have a natural a
415. n as a preset destination 1 Select the Mark screen button from the map screen to add the current vehicle position to the address book The Address Book screen appears 2 Select the Name screen button An alpha keyboard displays Enter the name Press the OK screen button then the Back screen button to return to the address book information screen 3 Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen until the name appears in that preset destination screen button It is now available to select from the Destination Entry screen To store an address book entry as a preset destination 1 2 Select the CONFIG hard key Select the Nav screen button or press the CONFIG key until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen button Select the Edit View screen button Select the address book entry to be stored as the preset destination Select the Name screen button to add a name if needed Press and hold one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen until the name appears in that preset destination screen button It is now available to select from the Destination Entry screen Configure Menu Press the CONFIG Configure hard key to adjust several of the system s features and preferences The last selected CONFIG screen is the screen that displays Sound Radio Nav navigation Display or Time 4 43 Sound Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repea
416. n or zoom out screen buttons are selected The system adjusts the map accordingly The scale of a map can range from 1 32 mi 50 m to 256 mi 400 km To change English or metric see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information Scrolling the Map Touch anywhere on the map screen and the scroll symbol appears Use this feature to scroll across the map Move your finger in any direction on the map screen and the map continues to scroll in that direction until you remove your finger from the screen If scrolling while the vehicle is in P Park the system scrolls initially at a slower rate It increases if you continue touching the map screen If scrolling while the vehicle is in motion there is one scroll speed and a limited distance to scroll Keep touching the map screen to scroll for a longer distance If you have used the scroll feature to scroll the map and the vehicle icon disappears off the screen press the NAV Navigation key to return to the current vehicle location on the map The scroll feature on the map can be used to set a destination See From Map under Destination on page 4 25 for more information While scrolling on the map press the GO screen button to calculate the route from the current position to the destination mark Symbols The following symbols are the most common symbols that appear on a map screen The vehicle is shown as this symbol It indicates the current pos
417. n the overhead console The vehicle must be in PARK P to use the power liftgate feature lt lt Press the top of the button to open or close the power liftgate OFF Press the bottom of the button for manual operation of the power liftgate The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the power liftgate is moving A CAUTION You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing Notice If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways e Press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter until the liftgate starts moving Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information e Pressing the liftgate button on the overhead console e Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside liftgate handle Pressing the buttons or touchpad switch a second time while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction lt The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation
418. n this system Root Directory The root directory will be treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory will be displayed as No Folder or ALL Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player will advance to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files and the empty folder will not be displayed or numbered No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files will be located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions will have no function on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio will display No Folder 4 74 Order of Play Play will begin from the first track under the root directory When all tracks from the root directory have been played play will continue from files according to their numerical listing After playing the last track from the last folder play will begin again at the first track of the first folder or root directory When play enters a new folder the display will not automatically show the new folder name The new track name will appear on the display File System and Naming The song name that will display will be the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the
419. nce Record cont d Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 060085 8 2 Online Owner Center cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 8 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users n n 8 6 Customer Assistance Offices cccceeeeee ee 8 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 8 7 Roadside Service ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenes 8 7 Scheduling Service Appointments 206 8 10 Courtesy Transportation Program 0 00 8 10 Collision Damage Repair eceeeeeeeneeeeenes 8 12 Reporting Safety Defects 00 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government eeeeeeeees 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 0c eeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 8 15 Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 8 16 Event Data Recorders ececeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 OnStar 2c ccchectd A E E T E ieee 8 18 Navigation System ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 8 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 8 18 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac Normally any c
420. nd the maximum pressure needed to support that load For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size P245 75R16 109S TUT B C D Passenger P Metric Tire A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association 6 58 B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 75 as shown in item C of the light truck LT Metric tire illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 75 as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed
421. ne exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer e Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Fo
422. ne oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Trailer Wiring Harness Heavy Duty Trailer Wiring Package The vehicle is equipped with the seven wire trailer towing harness This harness with a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector is attached to the rear bumper beam It is located next to the integrated trailer hitch 5 56 The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits e Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal e Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal e Brown Taillamps e White Ground e Light Green Back up Lamps e Red w Black Stripe Battery Feed e Dark Blue Trailer Brake The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center but the circuits are not connected They should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center If charging a remote non vehicle battery press the Tow Haul mode button if equipped located at the end of the shift lever This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the battery If the trailer is too light for Tow Haul mode or the vehicle is not equipped with Tow Haul turn on the headlamps as a second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the battery Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part
423. new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 6 113 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every brake stop the disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of
424. nfigure Menu on page 4 43 for deleting information from the address book Limit Features While Driving The navigation system may have this feature Touch the Limit Features While Driving screen button to turn the ability to limit functions on and off while driving When this screen button is highlighted the following functions are limited while driving e Music Navigator Scrolling e Radio Category Scrolling e Navigation Menu Scrolling and some functions See Category under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information See From Map under Destination on page 4 25 for more information Some functions will remain limited regardless of the setting Storing Radio Station Presets To set preset radio stations do the following 1 Press D to turn the system on 2 Press the AUDIO hard key and select the desired band AM FM or XM if equipped 3 Use the tuning knob or the SEEK arrows to tune to the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the five preset screen buttons at the bottom of the screen until a beep is heard or if the station displays on the selected preset button 5 Repeat the steps for each preset See Storing Radio Station Presets under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Setting the Clock The navigation system time and the analog clock operate independently Changing the time through the navigation system does not change the time on the analog clock
425. nformation it detects when the vehicle is on a downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the vehicle by pressing the brake Also see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 for more information 2 33 Cruise Grade Braking Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in Tow Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation from desired speed to determine the correct gear for the operating condition If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the trans will upshift allowing vehicle speed to increase While in the Range Select Mode RSM mode cruise grade braking is not available See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2 29 2 34 Parking Brake For vehicles with a release handle set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down then pushing down the parking brake pedal If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph 8 km h To re
426. ng Tuning Knob Turn this knob counterclockwise one notch to go to the start of the current track turn it again to go to the previous track Turn this knob clockwise to go to the next track When playing an audio CD the rear seat operator can power on the RSE video screen and use the remote control to navigate through the tracks on the CD Using an MP3 CD MP3 Format There are guidelines that must be met when creating an MP3 disc If the guidelines are not met when recording a CD R W the CD may not play The guidelines are e Sampling rate 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz and 44 1 kHz e Bit rates supported 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 and 320 kbps e ID3 tag information is displayed by the radio if itis available The radio supports ID3 tag information v1 0 v1 1 or v2 0 The radio will display a filename song name artist name aloum name and directory name e Maximum 32 characters including spaces in a file or folder name e Maximum number of folders is 100 with a maximum hierarchy of eight folders e Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or aloum should contain 18 songs or less 4 73 e Itis recommended that there is a maximum of 192 files on a disc e The files can be recorded on a CD R or CD RW with a maximum capacity of 700MB e DVD with MP3 are not playable o
427. ng See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways To replace the wiper blade assembly 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 15 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector 6 54 Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1 Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position 4 Replace the wiper blade 5 Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position 2 Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle 3 Turn the wiper blade assembly and pull it off of the wiper arm Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer A CAUTION e Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous
428. ng a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty Do not use liquid tire sealants 6 66 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are e One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor e The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service e Replacement tires or wheels do not matc
429. ng roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads With cruise control a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h When the brakes are applied cruise control is turned off For vehicles with an Allison or Hydra Matic 6 speed automatic transmission see Grade Braking and Cruise Grade Braking Allison Transmission under Tow Haul Mode on page 2 33 for an explanation of how cruise control interacts with the Range Selection Mode tow haul and grade braking systems If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the system begins to limit wheel spin cruise control will automatically disengage See StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again it can be turned back on 3 13 Bi Cancel Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on w
430. ng wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job 1 79 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 84 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 80 A CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge
431. nguage parental level and aspect 4 81 x Brightness Touch the up or down screen arrows to increase or decrease the brightness of the navigation screen Q Contrast Touch the up or down screen arrows to increase or decrease the contrast of the navigation screen Auto Automatic Touch this screen button for the system to automatically adjust the navigation screen background depending on exterior lighting conditions Night Touch this screen button and the system will make the navigation screen background brighten Day Touch this screen button and the system will make the navigation screen background darken Monitor From the DVD Setup screen touch this button to adjust the viewing angle of the DVD on the navigation screen This is not available on all DVDs This button is not available for DVD audio Touch the 4 button to close the screen in from the left and right sides Touch the lt gt button to fill the screen on the left and right sides Touch the button to fill the screen on the top and bottom 4 82 Settings From the DVD Setup screen touch this button to change the default audio subtitle and menu languages parental level audio and to view the aspect of the DVD These settings are not available on all DVDs This button is not available for DVD audio VD Settings Audio Language English Subtitle Language English Menu Language English Parental Level 8 Audio Language Touch Eng
432. nning and the vehicle in gear when going downhill e Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane e Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident e Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action See Off Road Driving on page 5 13 for information about driving off road Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions When driving through deep snow turn off the traction control part of the StabiliTrak System to help
433. nput IR Sensor Inoperative Check that the mode is selected batteries are good in the remote control e Check that the audio cable is securely plugged into the jack Check that the remote Control IR Sensor is not blocked Cleaning the Video Screens Aim the remote control toward the IR Sensor being The video display screens are made of a specially coated glass and can be scratched or damaged by abrasive products solvents or ammonia based window controlled cleaners Clean with a soft lint free cotton cloth that Select the correct has been slightly dampened with warm water Dry the screen 3 or 4 screens by wiping with a clean dry cotton cloth No picture Check that the correct video input mode is selected Check that the video cable is plugged into the jack securely 3 112 Cleaning the Components Use care when touching or cleaning the components such as the DVD player or the discs Do not use DVD lens cleaners for DVD players because the lens of the DVD optics can become contaminated by lubricants Handle CDs and DVDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD or DVD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD or DVD may not play properly or not at all If the surface of a CD or DVD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cl
434. nsmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 69 AUTO HIGH BEAMS If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to select to have the Intellibeam system turned off or on See Exterior Lamps on page 3 16 for more information Press the customization button until AUTO HIGH BEAMS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF default The Intellibeam system will be turned off ON The Intellibeam system will be turned on NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 70 CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings NOR
435. ntenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making d
436. o the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone 3 77 Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete lt phone name gt Yes or No followed by a tone 5 Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting lt phone name gt 3 78 Linking to a Different Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones e If another phone is found the response will be lt Phone name gt is now connected e If another phone is not found the original phone remains connected Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers e St
437. o use proper care when changing lanes may result in damage to the vehicle injury or death Always check the outside and rearview mirrors glance over your shoulder and use the turn signal before changing lanes When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone amber SBZA displays light up in the side mirrors This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes Before making a lane change always check the SBZA display check the outside and rearview mirrors look over your shoulder for vehicles and hazards and use the turn signal SBZA Detection Zones The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 5 m This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back approximately 16 ft 5 0 m The height of the zone is approximately between 1 5 ft 0 5 m and 6 ft 2 0 m off the ground Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a trailer is towed 2 45 How the System Works Left Side Mirror Display Right Side Mirror Display When the vehicle is started both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating When the vehicle is moving forward the left or right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected in that blind zone If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side the SBZA display will flash to give you
438. ocking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center DIC See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3 65 for more information on DIC programming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door The rear doors must be open to access them The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock To set the locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door When you want to open a rear door when the security lock
439. of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 6 59 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight 6 60 Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 Occupant D
440. of signals Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds Use your arms hands feet and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed At higher speeds e You approach things faster and have less time to react e There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles e The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles e More braking distance is needed especially on an unpaved surface A CAUTION When you are driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you are driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain Be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Surface Conditions Off roading surfaces can be hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle s steering acceleration and braking in different ways Depending on the surface slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances can occur Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles
441. of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 78 for more information 6 75 Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 76
442. of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 52 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 55 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 for more information Where Are the Airbags The driver s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 81 The right front passenger s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1 82 The roof rail airbags for the
443. oist Shaft H Spare Tire Valve C Hoist Shaft Access Stem Pointed Down Cover Hole Hoist Shaft D Jack Handle Access Hole Extensions J Hoist End of E Wheel Wrench Extension Tool F Hoist Cable K Spare Tire Lock 6 80 1 To reach the hoist shaft access cover C you will first need to remove the hitch cover Remove it by turning the two fasteners located at the bottom of the cover counterclockwise and then pull the cover down and rotate towards you 4 Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 2 Open the hoist shaft access cover C on the bumper to access the spare tire lock K 3 To remove the spare tire lock insert the ignition key turn it clockwise and then pull the lock out 6 81 If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System on page 6 89 for more information 7 Use the wheel wrench hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you to assist in reaching the spare tire 5 Insert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft access hole Be sure the hoist end J of the extension D connects to the hoist shaft B The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire 6 Turn the wheel wrench E counterclockwise to lower the spare tire H to the ground Continue to turn the wheel wrench until t
444. on This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature 3 57 ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode See Engine Overheating on page 6 30 for further information This message also displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low Refuel as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 46 and Fuel on page 6 5 for more information HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF This message displays when the heated windshield washer has been turned off See Windshield Washer on page 3 11 for more information 3 58 HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES P
445. on see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work If this vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information A CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it e Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 93 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 7 17 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equi
446. on a CD and to seek chapters on a DVD See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 CD Player on page 4 71 or DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information Touch Sensitive Screen Buttons Touch sensitive screen buttons are located on the screen When a screen button has been selected a beep sounds Screen buttons are highlighted when a feature is available Alpha Numeric Keyboard Letters of the alphabet symbols punctuation and numbers when available displays on the navigation screen as an alpha or numeric keyboard The alpha keyboard displays when the system requires entry of a city or street name All characters are touch sensitive screen buttons Touch a character to select it A Y Accent Alphabet Select to enter letters with accent symbols This button may toggle to A Z A Z Alphabet Select to enter letters from the alphabet This button may toggle to A Y 0 9 Numbers Select to enter numbers nll Space Select to enter a space between characters or the words of a name Backspace Select if an incorrect character has been entered To make name entries easier the system only highlights the characters that can follow the last one entered For example if a Z is entered a T may not be available for selection If a name does not display after entry it may need to be entered differently or the map DVD disc may not contain that information See Database Coverage Explanations on page 4 62 for more informa
447. on and Rotation 6 69 Installing the Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 6 84 Pressure Light secre sendacaeladaecanseetaress ainai 3 41 Pressure Monitor Operation seeeceseseeeeee 6 65 Pressure Monitor System 0sceeeeeeeeee ees 6 64 Removing the Flat Tire eee eee eee eee ee 6 84 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 79 Secondary Latch System ceeeeeeeeeee eee 6 89 Sidewall Labeling 0c eseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 6 57 Spare Tire sarrerei peceseencdarersmiearaseceseces 6 96 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 92 Terminology and Definitions eee 6 59 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeee 6 73 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 75 Wheel Replacement seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 75 When It Is Time for New Tires ccce 6 70 ToW Haul Modes iiini cneeeaneteineasendeeebonsingendne 2 33 Tow Haul Mode Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeee esate ees 3 46 Towing Recreational Vehicle 2 eeeeeeeeeeeereeees 5 40 TOWING a Traller niccciscicnbescandeeet at eacd wees eeecenie 5 44 Trailer Recommendations s eeeeeeeeeee es 5 57 YOUR VENICE izeidi aaa 5 40 Traction Magnetic Ride Control c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 9 Road Sensing Suspension eeeeeeeeeeeees 5 9 StabiliTrak System sisina init 5 6 Trailer Towing Recommendations 0eeeee
448. oncerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealers sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the United States call the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center 24 hours a day at 1 800 458 8006 In Canada call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre at 1 888 446 2000 We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative e Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location e Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Cadillac remember that your concern will likely be resolved at
449. onds with OK Dialing and dials the number e If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number e To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using lt phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag of the person to call e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number e If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using lt phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be hear
450. ons screen will display 5 Touch the Symbols screen button The screen button will be highlighted when on Rear Vision Camera Error Messages Service Rear Vision Camera System This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems 2 49 Rear Vision Camera System Unavailable Displays when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists see your dealer retailer A CAUTION The Rear Vision Camera RVC system does not replace driver vision RVC does not e Detect objects that are outside the camera s field of view below the bumper or underneath the vehicle e Detect children pedestrians bicyclists or pets Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear vision camera screen or use the screen during longer higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross traffic Your judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances So if you do not use proper care before backing up you could hit a vehicle child pedestrian bicyclist or pet resulting in vehicle damage injury or death Even though the vehicle has the RVC system always check carefully before backing up by checking behind and around the vehicle 2 50 Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located above the license plate The
451. oolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 6 25 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire if the vehicle has one See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 62 If the vehicle has a spare tire check to make sure it is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 78 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check A CAUTION Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a room around the vehicle level surface 2 Firmly ap
452. oordinates screen button S south to enter the direction of the latitude coordinate Enter the numeric portion of the latitude coordinate Select Longitude and select either E east or W west next to enter the direction of the longitude coordinate Enter the numeric portion of the longitude coordinate Once both coordinates are entered select the Go screen button The map screen with the destination marked displays Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information 4 34 Preset Destination The preset destination entry method lets you set a destination by selecting from one of five previously stored destinations Besides voice tagged destinations these are the only destinations available to set while the vehicle is moving If a destination is not set for one of the screen buttons the button is dimmed and not available for use See Adding or Changing Preset Destinations later in this section for information on how to add a preset destination Destination Entry Pu Address Entry A y Point of Interest Taa Address Book fo Previous Destination From Map na O aa e JEFFERSO RENAISSA ACO INC IMC Dona o To use the preset destination entry method 1 Press the DEST hard key
453. oper pressure See Tires on page 6 56 for more information 3 41 When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 64 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer 3 42 If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicl
454. or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off That will force outside air into your vehicle See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3 27 If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way If your vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function See Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 See Power Liftgate on page 2 14 for more information on how to use the power liftgate To unlock the liftgate use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 On vehicles with a liftglass press the button on the underside of the license pocket applique A to open it The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the liftglass release button on the RKE To open the entire liftgate press the power liftgate release button on the RKE or in the vehicle See Power Liftgate on page 2 14 You can also press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle B The liftgate will open after a slight delay The vehicle must be in PARK P to open the liftgate To close the liftgate use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear wipers are in motion Attempting to open the liftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are in mo
455. or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position CAUTION Continued 1 62 CAUTION Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 for additional information A CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever a child restraint is installed be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle
456. ore e Digit Store e Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number e Ifthe system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number followed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered 4 After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 e If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two s
457. ore information on how to enter a destination Press the DEST hard key the Route screen displays Press the Final Destination or Stopover screen button The information screen displays for that location Press the Add to Address Book screen button The address book screen appears Select the Name screen button An alpha keyboard displays Enter the name Select the Back screen button 8 Press and hold one of the screen buttons at the bottom of the screen until the name appears in the screen button on the display The name appears in that preset destination screen button and is now available to select from the Destination Entry screen See Using Your Stored Preset Destinations next in this section to select it as a destination See Adding or Changing Preset Destinations under Destination on page 4 25 for more information on how to add preset destinations Using Your Stored Preset Destinations These destinations are available for selection while driving 1 If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted skip to Step 5 2 Press D to turn the system on 3 Insert the DVD map disc See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more information 4 A caution may appear Touch the OK screen button to proceed 5 Press the DEST hard key 6 Select one of the available preset destination screen buttons A map screen with the destination marked appears 7 Select the rout
458. orted by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materi
459. oth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the bottom side of a CD or DVD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs or DVDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Rear Seat Audio RSA Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources radio CDs DVDs or other auxiliary sources The rear seat passengers can control the same music sources the front seat passengers are listening to dual control or a different source For example rear seat passengers can listen to and control a CD through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones RSA functions can be operated even when the main radio is off Audio can be heard through wired headphones not included plugged into the jacks on the RSA If the vehicle has this feature audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones The audio system allows the rear speakers to continue playing even when the RSA audio is active through the headphones To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the RSA attach the iPod or portable audio device to the auxiliary input if available located below the RSA Turn the iPod on then choose the auxi
460. ou are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park on page 2 36 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 2 39 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror This vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror with OnStar It may also have Intellibeam For more information on Intellibeam see Intellibeam Intelligent High Beam Headlamp Control System under Exterior Lamps on page 3 16 For more information on OnStar see OnStar System on page 2 52 Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off 2 40 Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror Use a soft towel dampened with water Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Controls for the outside power foldaway mirrors are located on the driver door armrest Mirror Adjustmen
461. ou decide it is safe to drive up the hill e Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel e Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain speed Not using more power than needed can avoid spinning the wheels or sliding A CAUTION Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up e Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route e Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill e Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic A CAUTION Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed AS you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert If the vehicle stalls or is about to stall and you cannot make it up the hill Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake If the engine is still running shift the transmission to R
462. oute later in this section for more information Coordinates gt From Map Touch to enter the From Map destination entry method 4 32 To use this destination entry method 1 Press the DEST hard key 2 Select the screen button A map screen displays with the scrolling symbol 3 Use the screen buttons and touch on the map to find the area that you would like to select as your destination Pressing holding and dragging your finger on the map activates fast scrolling 4 Press touch once on the area that you would like to set as your destination The map screen displays the address information 5 Select the Go screen button The map screen with the destination marked displays 6 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route 7 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information Map Coordinates The coordinates destination entry method lets you select a destination by entering latitude and longitude coordinates Ce Coordinates E it G LATITUDE e LONGITUDE Map Coordinates Touch to access the Coordinates Entry screen 4 33 To use the coordinates destination entry method le Press the DEST hard key 2 Select the From Map screen button 3 4 Select Latitude and select either N north or Select the Map C
463. ove it by a police officer Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash For emergency towing see Roadside Service on page 8 7 Gather the following information e Drivers name address phone number e Driver s license number e Owner s name address phone number e Vehicle license plate e Vehicle make model and model year e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Insurance company and policy number e General description of the damage to the other vehicle Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts See Collision Parts earlier in this section If the airbag has inflated see What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates on page 1 86 8 13 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional
464. ower reclining seatback are located on the outboard side of the front seats behind the power seat control e To recline the seatback tilt the top of the control rearward e To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of the control forward A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Features on page 1 7 Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down Rear Seats Heated Seats The rear outboard seats have the heated seat feature The buttons used to control this feature are loca
465. ox with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read these cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator CA This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index Adjustable Pedals i Airbag Readiness Light X Air Conditioning Antilock Brake System ABS amp Audio Steering Wheel Contro
466. p The other end of the negative cable connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct does not go to the dead battery It goes to a order making sure that the cables do not touch heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote each other or other metal negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 9 Connect the other end of the negative cable to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal 6 44 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the remote positive terminal cover if the vehicle has one to its original position All Wheel Drive Transfer Case If your vehicle is equi
467. pass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass To calibrate the compass use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls seats etc during the calibration procedure 2 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS Compass displays 3 Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration 4 The DIC will display CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES D
468. plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a
469. play button to play the CD Random Touch this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Touch Random again to turn off random play DISC Touch this screen button to view the list of loaded disc s Select the disc to play Rewind Touch and hold this button to rewind quickly through a track selection You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to stop rewinding The display will show the elapsed time of the track b gt Forward Touch and hold this button to fast forward quickly through a track selection You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to stop fast forwarding The display will show the elapsed time of the track lt lt Folder Artist Album Select the left or right arrow to go to the previous or next folder artist or album on the disc Press the middle screen button with the folder artist or album name to sort the MP3 by folder artist or album It may take a few minutes for the system to sort the MP3 K BV Seek To seek tracks press the up arrow to go to the next track Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If either arrow is pressed more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD The sound will mute while seeking Tuning Knob Turn this knob counterclockwise one notch to go to the start of the current track turn it again to go
470. plays the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the bumper see your dealer retailer The SBZA displays may remain on if a trailer is attached to the vehicle or a bicycle or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the driver turning it off the driver will not be able to turn SBZA back on using the DIC The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON option will not be selectable if the conditions for normal system operation are not met Until normal operating conditions for SBZA are met you should not rely upon SBZA while driving SBZA Error Messages The following messages may appear in the DIC SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF This message indicates that the driver has turned the system off SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE This message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your blind zone or the vehicle is passing through an open field of view area such as the desert where there is insufficient data for operation The sensor may be blocked by mud dirt snow ice slush or even heavy rainstorms This message may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray The vehicle does not need service For cleaning see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM If this message appears both SBZA displays will remain on indicating there is a problem with the S
471. ply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 2 34 on page 2 34 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the but do not start the engine Without applying the vehicle starts in any other position contact your regular brake try to move the shift lever out dealer retailer for service of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position e The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park e The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle be
472. pment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 104 If the vehicle has the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 also see Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 7 In all other engines use only unleaded gasoline See Gasoline Octane on page 6 5 Gasoline Octane If the vehicle has the 6 0L V8 engine VIN Code 5 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If the vehicle has the 6 2L V8 engine VIN Code 2 use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or high
473. position A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 26 Tumbling the Third Row Seat The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo space To tumble the seat do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Make sure the head rests are completely lowered there is nothing under in front of or on the seat 3 Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions previously listed under Folding the Seatbacks You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the floor unless the seatback is folded down 4 Unlatch the seat from the floor by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle on the rear of the seat near the bottom 5 Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor 6 Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place 7 Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked Put the seat in this position only when necessary for additional cargo space Returning the Third Row Seat from a Tumbled Position To return the seat to the normal seating position do the following 1 Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat 2 Make sure there is nothing that could become trapped under the seat 3 Release the seat
474. ppearance and develop a more vintage appearance with use Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather It is very important to not use any commercial leather cleaners or coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather Not only are those products not necessary they will permanently and adversely change the appearance and feel of the leather Never use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior Never use shoe polish on leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
475. pped with All Wheel Drive be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section There are two additional systems that need lubrication When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 How to Check Lubricant A Drain Plug B Filler Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug 6 45 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss could indicate a problem Have it inspected and repaired All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production They are not filled to reach a certain level When checking the fluid level on any axle variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume Also if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled
476. ps for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions To shift out of P Park the ignition must be in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied A LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition It may also lock the steering wheel and automatic transmission The key can be removed in LOCK OFF On vehicles with an automatic transmission the shift lever must be in P Park to turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF The steering may bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this doesn t work then the vehicle needs service Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer B ACC ACCESSORY This position let
477. r Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information FAV Favorite Press to access the preset stations See Storing Radio Station Presets under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information 4 13 R Phone Press to access calling through OnStar See OnStar System on page 2 52 and Bluetooth on page 3 75 for more information 2 Sound Press to access the Sound screen to adjust bass midrange treble and Digital Signal Processing DSP See Sound Menu under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information DEST Destination Press to access the Destination Entry screen to plan a destination See Destination on page 4 25 for more information CONFIG Configure Menu Press to adjust features for sound radio navigation and the display See Configure Menu on page 4 43 for more information NAV Navigation Press to view your vehicle s current position on the map screen Each press of this key cycles through Full Map and the tab that displays the current audio source AM FM CD etc Full Map displays the screen in full map view Selecting the audio tab splits the screen between the map screen and the current audio source screen menu See Audio under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information RPT Navigation Repeat Press to repeat the last voice guidance prompt K D V Seek Press the seek arrows to seek and scan radio stations to seek tracks
478. r button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation system can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 2 53 OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 115 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or i
479. r DVD Player on page 4 78 for more information AUDIO Press to display the audio screen Press to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped DISC or AUX Auxiliary or touch the screen button See CD Player on page 4 71 DVD Player on page 4 78 and Auxiliary Devices on page 4 85 for more information Finding a Station Full map XM 72 XM 32 AM source shown other sources similar If viewing a map screen touch the source screen AM FM XM CD etc button The display splits between the audio screen and the map screen All station changing functions can be performed from this screen 4 63 ISC AUX 2 49 i FM i043 xM7e xm4o xm72 xma2 FM source shown other sources similar FM source shown other sources similar If you do not want to view a split screen or you are not Category Touch the screen button located in the on a map screen press the AUDIO hard key middle of the screen to receive a list of all of the selected band stations in the area Use the up and down arrows to AMFMXM Touch tne source AM FM oF AN scroll the frequencies Touch the desired frequency equipped screen button or press the AUDIO key repeatedly until the desired source is highlighted XM lists also contain a category to select and the stations or channels that have broadcasts that relate to that category For XM touch the left and right arrow screen buttons to change categories 4 64 The station
480. r a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed This is a normal condition HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating the fluid WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when the washer fluid is low See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 Rear Window Wiper Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever To turn the rear wiper on slide the lever to a wiper position O Off Turns the wiper off amp Rear Wiper Delay Turns on the rear wiper delay Rear Wiper Turns on the rear wiper nw Rear Wiper Wash To turn on the rear wiper wash push the button on the end of the turn signal multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed For more washer cycles press and hold the button The rear window wiper washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on the wiper will return to the parked position and stop Cruise Control A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on windi
481. r dealer retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of your vehicle contact Roadside Service See Roadside Service on page 8 7 for more information Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The Remote Keyless Entry RKE system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this e Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather e Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal T
482. r for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times It will flash six times if tow haul mode is active Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the lever The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is released If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out check the fuse See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6 106 3 8 Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control DIC To turn the chime and message off move the turn signal lever to the off position Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Wu DZD Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use the high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even
483. r more than two seconds to turn off the navigation system RSE video screen and RSA If the vehicle has not been tuned off the RSE and the RSA can be turned back on by pressing this knob and will continue play of the last active source 4 79 DVD Menu Options Once a DVD starts to play the menu options and cursor screen buttons will automatically appear To display the menu Options screen button while a DVD is playing touch anywhere on the screen Options Select this screen button to view the menu option screen buttons Menu options are available when they are highlighted Some menu options are only available when the DVD is not playing Cursor Touch this button to access the cursor menu The arrows and other cursor options allow you to navigate the DVD menu options The cursor menu options are only available if a DVD has a menu Use the cursor menu to start a DVD video from the disc main menu lt q A gt y Arrow Buttons Use these arrow buttons to move around the DVD menu Enter Touch this button to select the highlighted option Return Touch this button to go back to the previous DVD menu Back Touch this button to go back to the main DVD display screen 4 80 Move Touch this button to move the cursor buttons back and forth from the bottom right corner to the top left corner of the screen Il gt Pause Play Touch this button to pause the DVD This button will then change to the play button Touch
484. r only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer Do not clean the vehicle using e A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces e Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal e Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mi
485. rage For extended storage of the vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time 6 40 Jump Starting If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information If the vehicle s battery or batteries has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because e They contain acid that can burn you e They contain gas that can explode or ignite e They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are
486. rash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib infant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force ona person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 1 56 A CAUTION Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go Q A 1 58 What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safet
487. ration on page 2 5 RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstructions and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system Have your dealer retailer inspect the system for problems See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 and Airbag System on page 1 79 for more information 3 60 SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system Under certain conditions the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster See Charging System Light on page 3 38 Driving with this problem could drain the battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible See your dealer retailer SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service as soon as possible
488. rature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any
489. re can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 7 e To open the fuel door push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door A CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all t
490. re placed on the roof place the load in the area over the rear wheels behind the rear side door on extended models If needed cut a piece of 3 8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load If plywood is used tie it to the siderail supports e Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding To move the crossrails pull out on the latch release handle at each end Slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side Push the release handle back into the latched position and slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure the latch snaps securely into place f needed to carry long items move the crossrails as far apart as they will go Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports Also tie the load to the bumpers Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged e After moving a crossrail be sure it is securely locked into the siderail A Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL is located above the glass or above the rear load doors If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit Rear Storage Area For vehicles with a rear storage area it is located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver s side trim panel Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access the storage compar
491. reases audio distortion It is always best to power a portable audio device through its own battery while playing How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature perform the following 1 Press the L button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control y F lt gt navigation arrows and the button to use the setup menu 3 Press the L button again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones e Vehicle Speakers e Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if the vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system if the vehicle has this feature The DVD player can be selected as an audio source on the RSA system See Rear Seat Audio RSA on page 3 113 for more information When a device is connected to the A V jacks the rear seat passengers are be able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are ab
492. ree of debris During any maintenance if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced n Severe Service Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly used for trailer towing or driven in city traffic wet environment or high ambient temperatures Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 6 15 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine c
493. rightness Contrast Mode Rear Camera Options Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Display screen button Display Off Touch this screen button to turn the display off Press any hard key to view the display 4 57 Brightness Contrast Mode Touch this screen button to change the brightness contrast and mode of the display Brightness Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen Q Contrast Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen 4 58 Auto Automatic Touch this screen button for the system to automatically adjust the screen background depending on exterior lighting conditions Night Touch this screen button and the system makes the map background darker Day Touch this screen button and the system makes the map background brighter Setting the Clock The navigation system time and the analog clock operate independently Changing the time through the navigation system does not change the time on the analog clock See Analog Clock on page 3 26 to change the analog clock time Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until the time is selected or touch the time screen button Hours Press the minus or plus signs to decr
494. rive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to the previous menu 3 55 DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed When you change the engine oil be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 for information on how to reset the message See Engine Oil on page 6 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 4 for more information 3 56 CH
495. rm system This is the security light To arm the theft deterrent system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the power door lock switch The security light will come on to inform the driver the system is arming If a door is open when the doors are locked the security light will flash If the delayed locking feature is turned on the theft deterrent system will not start the arming process until the last door is closed and the delay timer has expired See Delayed Locking on page 2 10 3 Close all doors The security light should go off after about 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the security light goes off If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter a ten second pre alarm will occur The horn will chirp and the lights will flash If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre alarm the alarm will go off Your vehicle s headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds then will turn off to save the battery power The theft deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle s key or the manual door lock It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition
496. roblem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System TCS When this message displays the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly See your dealer retailer for service See StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 for more information 3 62 SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system has been turned off See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 44 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system this message displays when the SBZA system is disabled because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your blind zone The sensor may be blocked by mud dirt snow ice or slush This message may also display during heavy rain or due to road spray It may also come on when driving in isolated areas with no guardrails trees or road signs and light traffic Your vehicle does not need service For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 See Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA on page 2 44 for more information STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak this message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak or when the stability control has been au
497. ront ashtray and cigarette lighter are located in the center console near the cupholders if the vehicle has them Press on the access door to open it and use the ashtray and lighter Notice lf papers pins or other flammable items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray To remove the ashtray pull it from the center console Slide it back in and push down to be sure it is secure To use the cigarette lighter push it in all the way and let go When it is ready it will pop back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating 3 26 Analog Clock The analog clock is not connected with any other vehicle system and runs by itself To adjust the clock do the following i Locate the adjustment button near the lower left corner of the clock Push and hold the adjustment button to advance the clock hands Holding the button down will cause the clock to advance faster Release the button before you get to the desired time Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute increments until the desired time is reached Climate Controls G
498. roof will then open halfway and the air deflector will raise To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Express Close or Manual Close functions described previously If the sunroof is in the vent position and there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof To close the sunroof once it has re opened refer to the Manual Close or Express Close functions described previously Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use Debris can collect in the tracks damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview eee 3 4 Battery Run Down Protection eee 3 25 Hazard Warning Flashers cecce 3 6 Accessory Power Outlet S e eeeeeeeeee ees 3 25 OMe ete dncciicdautesk oi cecisesinietagecitaatal bnauseeeanaeanes 3 6 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 00 3 26 MIE WNC daissen raa ea a EEEE 3 6 Analog CIOCK cccccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaes 3 26 Heated Steering Wheel eceeeeeeeees 3 6 Climate Controls 0 0 cccccsececceseeseeseeeeeeeees 3 27 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever cceeeee 3 Dual Automatic Climate Control System 3 27 Turn and Lane Change Signals ee 3 8 Outlet Adjustment cccceeee
499. rors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed On some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature the pedals will also automatically move See Relearn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 8 for more information Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED This feature allows you to enable or dis
500. route Allow toll road This feature allows the system to use toll roads when calculating a planned route Allow ferry This feature allows the system to use ferries when calculating a planned route Allow time and seasonal restricted road This feature allows the system to use time restricted and seasonal roads when calculating a planned route Edit Address Book How to Add To add an address to the address book see Adding Destinations to the Address Book under Destination on page 4 25 4 45 Edit Address Book Edit View To add or change the phone number of an address book entry 1 Select the CONFIG hard key To edit the name of an address book 1 Select the CONFIG hard key 2 Select the NAV screen button a DEIPTLINE NAN als puttan 3 Select the Edit View Address Book screen button 3 Select the Edit View Address Book screen button 4 Select the Address book entry 4 Select the address book entry to change l l 7 5 Touch the Phone screen button and use the x numeric keyboard to input or change the phone number 6 Touch the OK screen button to save your changes then touch the Back screen button to return to the Address Book information screen To change the map icon of an address book entry 1 Select the CONFIG hard key Select the NAV screen button Select the Edit View Address Book screen button Select the address book entry to change Select the Icon screen button
501. rrect hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A Body to Ground Distance B Front of Vehicle When using a weight distributing hitch the hitch must be adjusted so that the distance A remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle If a step bumper hitch is used the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper 5 49 When pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 5 000 Ibs 2 270 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving Always use sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Hitch Cover The vehicle may have a hitch cover To remove the hitch cover 1 Turn the fasteners on the lower tabs 90 degrees counterclockwise 2 Lift the lower edge of the cover about 45 degrees 3 Pull the cover downward to disengage the upper attachments 5 50 To reinstall the hitch cover 1 Hold the cover at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle and push the upper tabs in the hitch cover into the chrome slots in the fascia 2 Move the bottom of
502. rs but instead get service help right away See Roadside Service on page 8 7 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency Notice f the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See O
503. rst tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes tom atch all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The 1 2 3 4 6 68 TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below Set the parking brake Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen Start with the driver side front tire 11 Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor
504. s disconnected or has low voltage the liftgate will not open The liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected with adequate voltage the switch is not disabled and the liftgate still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealer retailer for service 2 16 Power Assist Steps Your vehicle may have power assist steps The power assist steps automatically extend from beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has been opened Once the door is closed the assist steps automatically move back under the vehicle after a brief delay The vehicle must not be moving for the assist steps to extend or retract The switch used to disable the power assist steps is located on the center console below the climate control system E y The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended position Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 2 17 Power Windows A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windo
505. s Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit T 2 3 Turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 76 1 90 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 1 2 Restart the vehicle The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child s seating posture and body build It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens use the following steps to allow the Adult Size Occupant system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional
506. s applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 6 40 for more information To shift out of P Park use the following 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Ease the pressure on the shift lever 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever all the way into P Park 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you are still having a problem shifting then have the vehicle serviced soon 2 37 Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if e The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes e The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different CAUTION Continued 2 38 CAUTION Continued e The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage
507. s are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available cities Select this button to view the list and select a city Once a city has been selected the Street name category is automatically selected for entry Start entering the street name If five or less names are available a list displays If more than five are available the List screen button displays a number This number represents the number of available streets Select this button to view the list Once a street has been selected press the House screen button to enter the house number The system displays the house number range that is available for the street Select the Go screen button The map screen with the destination marked displays Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information To enter a destination by entering the street name first il 2 3 Press the DEST hard key Select the Select the state province screen button if needed to change the current state or province A list of all of the available states and provinces appear Select the state or province screen button Select the Street screen button an
508. s audio files such as CD R with downloaded MP3 files MPEG or JPEG files The DVD player and discs are coded by global region The DVD players are set to Region 1 Discs with other region codes will not work in the players If an error message displays on the video screen see DVD Messages later in this section While the vehicle is moving passengers should not unfasten their safety belts to make adjustments to the video screen control buttons See Safety Belts under Seats and Restraint Systems in the vehicle s owner manual Use the remote control for any necessary adjustments See Remote Control later in this supplement POWER Press to turn the power on or off Each video screen can be powered on or off independently EJECT amp Press to eject a disc from the DVD slot If a disc is ejected from the player but not removed it will automatically reload into the player Another way to reload a disc that has been ejected but not removed from the DVD player is to press the eject button or the play button PLAY P Press this button located below the video display screen to start playback of a disc On DVDs and video CDs with playback control PBC menu screens can display automatically It might be necessary to press the play button again to begin play There is a play position memory feature for DVD and video CD only If the DVD player is turned off and then turned back on the DVD player resumes p
509. s the CONFIG key to access the Sound menu to adjust the treble midrange bass fade balance and Digital Signal Processing DSP The system automatically stores audio adjustment settings as changes are made for each audio source including AM FM XM if equipped CD and AUX 4 66 Setting the Tone TREBLE Touch the plus or minus sign to increase or decrease the treble If a station is weak or has static decrease the treble MID Midrange Touch the plus or minus sign to increase or decrease the midrange BASS Touch the plus or minus sign to increase or decrease the bass Adjusting the Speakers L R Left Right Balance To adjust the balance between the left and the right speakers touch and hold the L or R screen buttons Front Rear Fade To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers touch and hold the Front or Rear screen buttons Digital Signal Processing DSP The system has Digital Signal Processing DSP DSP provides a choice of four different listening experiences DSP can be used while listening to the audio system Not all DSP modes are available for all source types The type of DSP selected is displayed on the status line Select from the following DSP settings Normal Adjusts the audio for normal mode This provides the best sound quality for all seating positions Surround Centerpoint Enables Bose Centerpoint signal processing that produces
510. s things like the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the engine is off Use this position if the vehicle must be pushed or towed C ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time D START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition 2 25 Retained Accessory Power RAP The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off e Audio System e Power Windows OnStar System if equipped e Sunroof if equipped These features work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is open
511. s to add are dark in color Touch the category to be added or removed Touch the Restore All Categories screen button to add all categories that have been removed Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data System RDS RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information With RDS the radio can do the following e Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies e Display messages from radio stations This system relies on receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station The RDS system is always on When information is broadcast from the FM station that is playing the station name or call letters displays on the audio screen XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online while not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or ca
512. s to choose between 2X 4X 8X 16X and 32X speeds PREV M4 Previous Press to play the previous chapter or track To return to previous chapters or tracks one at a time press and release multiple times until the desired chapter or track is reached NEXT PPI Press to play the next chapter or track To go to the next chapter or track one at a time press and release multiple times until the desired chapter or track is reached Battery Replacement To change batteries in the remote control 1 Turn the remote control face down 2 Press down on the ridged area of the battery cover and slide it off 3 Install two AAA batteries into the battery compartment 4 Slide the cover back on until it clicks If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep it in a cool dry place Using the RSE On Screen Display OSD Menus Use the OSD setup display menus for e Initial setup e Display setup e Parental control setup e Adjusting the picture quality e Setting the various outputs e On screen display language To use the OSD menus while using the DVD player or an auxiliary device 1 Press the SETUP button on the remote control to display the icons and pages on the display screen 2 Select the desired page by using the left right navigation arrows to move the cursor 3 Press the SETUP button again on the remote control to cancel use of the setup display Not all DVDs support all o
513. se seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 94 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates 1 92 The on indicator may be lit if an object such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device is put on an unoccupied seat If this is not desired remove the object from the seat A CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so 1 93 Adding Equipment to
514. se the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt Fast Forward Press to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 2 Audio Press to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Subtitles Press to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function varies for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source 3 94 If the vehicle has a third row video screen the AUX button controls the source display on the second row video screen and the third row video screen as described in the table below Aux Button Second Row Third Row Press Screen Screen Default State DVD Media DVD Media No Press Aux Video Aux Video Aux Video Second Press DVD Media Third Press Aux Video Return to Return to Default State Default State Camera Press to change camera angles on DVDs th
515. se to a preset factory position Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto reverse The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed Express Window Anti Pinch Override A CAUTION If express override is activated the window will not reverse automatically You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged Before you use express override make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path In an emergency the anti pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode Hold the window switch all the way up to the second position The window will rise for as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released the express mode is re activated In this mode the window can still close on an object in its path Use care when using the override mode Programming the Power Windows If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged disconnected or is not working you will need to reprogram each front power window for the express up feature to work Before reprogramming replace or recharge the vehicle s battery To program each front window follow these steps 1 With the ignition in ACC ACCESSORY ON RUN or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active close all doors 2 Press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully open 3 Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed
516. senger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG amp OFF ON 2 M SA United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 37 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbag and the roof rail airbags if equipped are not affected by the passenger sensing system 1 87 The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a boost
517. sentatvecuelanyeeeas 1 96 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccecce 2 26 Ride Control Systems Road Sensing Suspension 0e eeeeeeeeeeee 5 9 Road Sensing Suspension 0c eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 9 Roadside Service ccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneneee 8 7 12 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 32 Roof SUNNOOE weeds ssedved hawewss ce ideddes E EEEa 2 65 Running the Vehicle While Parked 4 2 39 Safety Belts Gane OF vecde hacidciusensestne a vases 6 100 Extender cas sessts tase ideri aaa ee chiee es 1 51 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 35 Lap Belt wiccciiccineetcansisemestnccs pinnana 1 50 Lap Shoulder Belt c cssvceiisieneniceiees 1 43 Reminders 0ccecec cece cece ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 35 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 30 Use During Pregnancy cceeeeeeeeeeee eee ee 1 50 Safety Defects Reporting General MOTOTS sssivsiccscteevesecssestecssieacereeateees 8 15 U S Government ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 14 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0 c0eeeeeees iv Scheduled Maintenance c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 7 4 Additional Required Services 0c0eee 7 6 Scheduling Appointments eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 10 Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat ceceeeeeeeeee ee 1 11 Bucket Seats R ar cccceceeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 17 Center Seat
518. signate the level of cooling selected three for high two for medium and one for low 1 6 lt Heated Seatback To heat only the seatback press the button with the heated seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seatback off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low Heated Seat and Seatback To heat the entire seat press the button with the heated seat and seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the ignition is turned off If you want to use the heated and cooled seat feature after you restart your vehicle you will need to press the appropriate seat button again Memory Features Your vehicle has the memory package The controls for this feature are located on the driver s door and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seat outside mirrors steering wheel position and the adjustable
519. socket insert the socket arampassemo y into the taillamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks 7 Reinstall the taillamp assembly When reinstalling make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp l ce assembly with the vehicle If you do not line up the pins correctly you will not be able install the taillamp assembly properly s If you need to replace the taillamp stoplamp or turn signal you will need to see your dealer retailer for service 3 Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle 4 Press the release tab if the bulb socket has one and turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly 6 52 License Plate Lamp 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 4 Install the new bulb 5 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back up Lamp 7440 License Plate Lamp For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer 1 Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate 2 Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward through the molding opening 6 53 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracki
520. soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following e Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 6 9 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off e Ifthe vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off e Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 6 5 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment
521. spected or replaced 1 96 If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 36 Section 2 Features and Controls K s anara AE ETE EE 2 3 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 New Vehicle Break In cceceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System IGNITION POSITIONS isset aa ng ngasncasaes 2 25 Operation eceran iuern nEs 2 5 Retained Accessory Power RAP sscccccc 2 26 Remote Vehicle Start cceceeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 2 8 Starting the Engine scssisrsricsrsrisiaicniseernii 2 26 Doors and LockS ices sca icta ea ceetersenccsesee canada 2 10 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal 2 27 Door LOCKS marea E 2 10 Engine Coolant Heater sceeeeeees 2 28 Power Door LOCKS 00ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 Automatic Transmission Operation 0 2 29 Delayed LOC
522. speed in small increments press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control e Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it e To slow down in very small amounts press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed 3 15 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle s speed down When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control e Step lightly on the brake pedal e Press the button on the steering wheel e Press the button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set soeed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned of
523. ss door release to open and use the front cupholders Push the door back down to close it Push down and then back on the front cupholder to remove it for cleaning Heated and Cooled Cupholders For vehicles with heated and cooled cupholders these are located in the front center console Press down on the access door release button to open the cupholder door 2 62 To set to cool mode press and release the button the shows blue Press and release again to turn it off To set to heat mode press and release the button the Ut shows red Press and release again to turn it off Insulated containers will not work properly Use only non insulated containers Notice When the cuphholder is turned on the inside receptacles are hot or cold Temperature variations in the cupholders may cause condensation To avoid damage do not store electronic devices or other items here Rear Passenger Cupholders Pull down on the lid to access the cupholders in the rear floor console Vehicles with the rear seat armrest may also contain cupholders Pull down the armrest to use the cupholders Center Console Storage A console compartment is located between the bucket seats The console has both an upper and lower storage bin accessed by lifting up on the latches located at the front of the console lid The console may have an accessory power outlet inside See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 3 25 The rear of the consol
524. st Assembly Hoist Shaft Hoist Shaft Access Cover Hole Jack Handle Extensions Wheel Wrench Hoist Cable Tire Wheel Retainer H Spare Tire Flat Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down Hoist Shaft Access Hole J Hoist End of Extension Tool K Spare Tire Lock 1 Put the tire H on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear 2 Tilt the tire toward the vehicle Separate the tire wheel retainer G from the guide pin Pull the pin through the center of the wheel Tilt the retainer down and through the center wheel opening 3 Assemble the two jack handle extensions D and wheel wrench E as shown 6 93 4 Insert the open end of the extension J through the hole in the rear bumper I hoist shaft access hole 5 Raise the tire part way upward Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel and centered in the wheel opening 6 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 6 94 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable Reinstall the spare tire lock Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover Reinstall the hitch cover To store the tools Wheel
525. still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Do not drive through rushing water Heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before driving through it Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe you probably will not get through Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts If the water is not too deep drive slowly through it At faster speeds water splashes on the ignition system and the vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water If the tailpipe is under water you will never be able to start the engine When going through water remember that when the brakes get wet it might take longer to stop See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 5 26 After Off Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information Drivin
526. stomization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the customization button to scroll through the available customizable options Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the customization button until the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to display all DIC messages in English 3 65 DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button once to access the settings for this feature Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English DEUTSCH All messages will appear in German ITALIANO All messages will appear in Italian FRANCAIS All messages will appear in French ESPANOL All messages will appear in Spanish ARABIC All messages will app
527. straint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position A CAUTION A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position 1 75 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position This vehicle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 67 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 87 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 37 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear
528. sts the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path When the vehicle is started and begins to move the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle The system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph 32 km h In some cases it may take approximately two miles of driving before the system initializes If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates the cruise control automatically disengages The cruise control can be re engaged when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 3 13 If the system fails to turn on or activate the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center DIC TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL STABILITRAK OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK If these DIC messages appear make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on off button Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o clock position to the three o
529. t 1 Press C to fold the mirrors out to the driving position 2 Press D to fold the mirrors in to the folded position Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if e The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding e They are accidentally manually folded unfolded e The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position e The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power foldaway mirrors This sound is normal after a manual folding operation Automatic Dimming Adjust the driver outside mirror for the glare of the headlamps behind your vehicle See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2 40 for more information Turn Signal Indicator The vehicle has a turn signal indicator on the mirror An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Park Tilt Mirrors If the vehicle has the memory package the passenger and or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R Reverse This feature lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking The mirror s return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R Reverse or the ignition is turned off or to OFF LOCK Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Customization
530. t 15 mph 25 km h take the vehicle to your dealer retailer 2 44 Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA The vehicle may have a Side Blind Zone Alert SBZA system Read this entire section before using the system The SBZA system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 310 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Frequency of operation 24 05GHz 24 25GHz Field Strength Not greater than 2 5V m peak 0 25V m average at a distance of 3m The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment A CAUTION SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not replace driver vision SBZA does not detect e Vehicles outside the side blind zones which may be rapidly approaching e Pedestrians bicyclists or animals Failure t
531. t smoke fog snow road spray mist or other airborne obstructions Your vehicle s windshield is dirty cracked or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the IntelliBeam light sensor Your vehicle s windshield is covered with ice dirt haze or other obstructions Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end of the vehicle points upward causing the IntelliBeam sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps You are driving on winding or hilly roads You may need to manually disable or cancel the high beam headlamps by turning the low beam headlamps on if any of the above conditions exist 3 19 Disabling and Resetting IntelliBeam at the Rearview Mirror IntelliBeam can be disabled by using the controls on the inside rearview mirror AUTO D On Off To disable the system press this button on the inside rearview mirror The IntelliBeam indicator will turn off and will not come back on until the IntelliBeam button is pressed again Stalk Disable When IntelliBeam has turned on the high beams pull or push the high beam stalk This will disable IntelliBeam The IntelliBeam indicator on the mirror will turn off To re enable IntelliBeam press the IntelliBeam button on the mirror A different sensitivity setting is available for dealer diagnostics This is done by pushing and holding this button for 20 seconds until the IntelliBeam indicator light flashes three times If you a
532. t in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 617 1 71 The vehicle s lap shoulder belts for the first and second row seating positions are equipped with free falling latch plates
533. t instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 1 69 1 70 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restrain
534. t positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 1 59 A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 60 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 63 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecure
535. t the jack lift Front Position head into the proper location before raising the vehicle Front Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension Attach the wheel wrench 4 Position the jack under the vehicle as shown to the jack handle extension Attach the jack handle to the jack A Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 6 85 5 Remove all of the wheel nuts 6 Take off the flat tire Rear Position Rear Tire Flat If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle you will need to use the jack handle B and both jack handle extensions C Attach the wheel wrench D to the jack handle extensions C Attach the jack handle B to the jack A Use the jacking pad E provided on the rear axle Turn the wheel wrench D clockwise to raise the vehicle Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground 6 86 A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
536. tact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week OnStar Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving Directions Advisor delivered RideAssist Information and Convenience Services OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit onstar com or onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnSta
537. taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible Clean the engine air cleaner filter sealing surfaces and the housing Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws A CAUTION Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission If you suspect a small leak then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level However if there is a large leak then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the Maintenance Schedule See Scheduled Maintenance on pag
538. tarted Suspend Guidance Press this screen button from the Route screen to put the current route on hold Resume Guidance Press this screen button from the Route screen to resume guidance on the current route Cancel Guidance Press this screen button from the Route screen to cancel the current route 4 41 Adding Destinations to the Address Book There are two ways to add a destination to the address book e To add the current vehicle position to the address book press the Mark screen button from the map screen The system automatically saves the current vehicle information in the address book When scrolling on the map the Mark screen button automatically adds the current scrolled position information in the address book e Press the Add to Address Book screen button when available on POI information screens Destination Entry screens or POI screens The system automatically saves this information in the address book See Nav under Configure Menu on page 4 43 for information on editing address book entries 4 42 Adding or Changing Preset Destinations This feature allows additions or changes one of five preset destinations When a destination has been added as a preset destination it is available to select from the Destination Entry screen See Preset Destination previously for information on how to select a preset destination as a final destination To store the current vehicle positio
539. te all name tags e Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial Digit Dial Call Re dial 3 81 Usi 1 2 3 3 82 ng the Dial Command Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Dial The system responds with Dial using lt phone name gt Number please followed by atone Say the entire number without pausing e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the number e If the system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered Using the Digit Dial Command Ns 2 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Digit Dial The system responds with Digit dial using lt phone name gt please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system resp
540. ted on the Rear Seat Audio RSA panel Driver s Side RSA Heated Seat Button Only shown W Heated Seat To heat the seat cushion press the button with the heated seat symbol A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn it off Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off If the vehicle is restarted the heated seat button will need to be pressed again to restart the feature 60 40 Split Bench Seat Second Row If your vehicle has a 60 40 split bench the seat s can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats if your vehicle has them These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat s To fold and tumble the seat do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat
541. ted properly there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck spinal injury in a crash Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 1 2 _ Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The head restraints are not designed to be removed The vehicle may also be equipped with manually tilting head restraints in the outboard seating positions The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down Front Seats Power Seats Driver Seat with Power Seat Control Power Recline and Power Lumbar shown The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the front seats e Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward e Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down 1 3 e Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down e Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down The power reclining seatback con
542. tedly until Sound is selected or touch the Sound screen button to make speaker and DSP Digital Signal Processing adjustments See Sound Menu under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information Radio Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Radio is selected or touch the Radio screen button to make changes for radio information displayed preset pages XM categories and Bose AudioPilot See Radio Menu under Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information 4 44 Nav Navigation Sound ina Edit Address Book Press the CONFIG key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Nav is selected or touch the Nav screen button Voice Prompt Voice Prompt Touch the Voice Prompt screen button to change the volume of the voice prompts or to turn voice guidance on and off Volume Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or to decrease the volume of the voice prompts The system will respond with the adjusted voice level Voice Guidance Touch the On or Off screen buttons to turn voice instructions on and off while traveling on a planned route Route Preference Touch the Route Preference screen button to change route options when the system calculates a route Allow Major Roads This feature allows the system to use major roads when calculating a planned
543. tem can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver Information Center DIC to indicate that URPA is off see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 56 for information about clearing the message 2 43 When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R Reverse This occurs under the following conditions e The driver disables the system e The ultrasonic sensors are not clean Keep the vehicle s rear bumper free of mud dirt snow ice and slush For cleaning instructions see Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 100 e A trailer was attached to the vehicle or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the last drive cycle the red light may illuminate in the rear display Once the attached object is removed URPA will return to normal operation e A tow bar is attached to the vehicle e The vehicle s bumper is damaged Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer to repair the system e Other conditions may affect system performance such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck If the system is still disabled after driving forward at leas
544. tem controls cannot be used the when vehicle is moving After you acknowledge the start up information you will be able to access the NAV navigation and DEST destination functions Once accessed you can enter or delete information in the navigation system or access other functions See instructions later in this section help avoid a crash in led Always concentrate on your rivi eS and mind on the road and Every fifty times the vehicle is started and the navigation system is turned on the Caution screen appears After reading the caution select OK to load the map DVD information If OK is not selected all hard keys except for NAV Navigation and DEST Destination can be accessed You can also press the NAV hard key to have this Caution screen appear When getting started set the navigation system to your preference or delete information you may have entered using various options Language English Metric To change the language of the navigation screens see Driver Information Center DIC on page 3 47 for more information To change the navigation screens from English or metric see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information Deleting Personal Information This navigation system can record and store personal information such as names and addresses Delete this information when selling your vehicle or returning a leased vehicle See Edit Address Book Edit View under Co
545. tempt is made to turn on the traffic display in the Navigation Setup Menu without a subscription a Caution screen displays indicating that XM traffic is not activated BluesvVille Traffic e o Full Map oe XM Nav Traffic requires a subscription To check traffic availability in your area and activate service record your XM radio ID and call United States Subscribers 1 800 874 9844 Canadian Subscribers 1 877 438 9677 Tune to XM channel 0 to record your XM radio ID Three types of traffic information for major roadways are displayed on the navigation system e Unscheduled traffic incident data such as accidents and disabled vehicles e Scheduled traffic incident data such as road construction and road closures e Traffic flow information rate of speed data Traffic information is delivered to the vehicle by the XM Radio satellites XM NavTraffic makes it possible for the navigation system to provide continuously updated traffic information personalized for a driver s needs XM NavtTraffic currently broadcasts the traffic information for many markets nationally and the service may be available in more cities in the future Visit xmnavtraffic com for more details on local coverage A service fee is required in order to receive the XM NavtTraffic service Turning XM NavTraffic On and Off To turn traffic on or off 1 Press the CONFIG hard key then press the CONFIG key repeatedly until Nav is sele
546. tereias 3 6 Safety and Symbols seriis iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance cee 6 75 Different SZE ecascwccks dikes vidwnassnndre idaceke eee chee 6 73 Replacement ornen Moet EEN 6 75 When It Is Time for New Tires ccecce 6 70 Where to Put the Child Restraint 00 1 61 WVINGOWS oct nascsaacengtiea stages teens sen tegassieasanensiat 2 17 POWGI share srccnct teeta E EA 2 18 Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades Cleaning 6 102 Rainsense I Wipers 1 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 10 Washam icsctceceticntaacacdaatactetecdaastaed neaatsdaecaess 3 11 16 Windshield cont Washer FIUIG carecas agn noan 6 34 Wiper Blade Replacement n c risiscriniriisnnanss ei 6 54 Wiper FUSES lt i i2sicispcinneecascnrdaakenedaveenriatieces 6 105 WIPGIS ereite paaa eE a E 3 9 Winter Driving scs222hsieviaiies bss aeiadendeendtiacies 5 29 Wipers Rear Washer sescsaitecarastiviads nea n dias 3 12 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 3 117 Your Vehicle and the Environment 00 7 2
547. that states Check Surroundings for Safety Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen press the CONFIG hard key while the rear vision camera image is on the display Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen Brightness Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen Q Contrast Touch the plus or minus screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist URPA system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on the Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable error message may display See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist URPA on page 2 42 The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen To turn the symbols on or off 1 Make sure that URPA has not been disabled 2 Shift into P Park 3 Press the CONFIG hard key to enter the configure menu options then press the CONFIG hard key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Display screen button 4 Select the Rear Camera Options screen button The Rear Camera Opti
548. the automatic control of IntelliBeam until any of the following situations occur e The system detects an approaching vehicle s headlamps e The system detects a preceding vehicle s taillamps e The outside light is bright enough that high beam headlamps are not required e The vehicle s speed drops below 15 mph 24 km h e The headlamp stalk is moved forward to the high beam position See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 When either of these conditions occur the IntelliBeam feature will be disabled and the IntelliBeam light in the mirror will turn off until the high beam stalk is returned to the neutral position If IntelliBeam was using low beams prior to this action the IntelliBeam feature will be temporarily disabled until the stalk is returned to the neutral position e The exterior lamp control is turned to any setting except AUTO When this occurs IntelliBeam will be disabled until the control is turned back to the AUTO position e The IntelliBeam system is turned off at the inside rearview mirror IntelliBeam may not turn off the high beams if the system cannot detect other vehicle s lamps because of any of the following e The others vehicle s lamp s are missing damaged obstructed from view or otherwise undetected e The other vehicle s lamp s are covered with dirt snow and or road spray e The other vehicle s lamp s cannot be detected due to dense exhaus
549. the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service your vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears the following services checks and inspections are required Q Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 6 15 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 18 An Emission Control Service QO Lubricate chassis components See footnote Q Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote j Q Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator if equipped If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 19 See footnote k Q Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 69 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 7 10 Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant and windshield
550. the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 3 89 Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks are located on the rear of the floor console The A V jacks allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables not included may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system 3 90 To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX auxiliary button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio plays the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Navigation Audio System on page 4 62 for more information For optimal sound quality increase the portable audio device s volume to the loudest level Higher levels of volume dec
551. the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiousl
552. till on If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 2 35 Shifting Into Park A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 1 Hold the brake pedal down then set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into the P Park position by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park 2 36 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the park
553. time that track has been playing the total amount of time on the disc and the current time running on the disc DISPLAY Press to choose from the following display options 1 Press DISPLAY once and Single Elapsed appears along with the current track playing and the length of time for that track 2 Press DISPLAY twice and Single Remain appears along with the current track playing and the amount of time left on the track 3 Press DISPLAY three times and Total Elapsed appears along with the current track playing and the total time that has played on the CD 4 Press DISPLAY four times and Total Remain appears along with the current track playing and the amount of time left on the CD 3 110 REPEAT Press to toggle between Track and All The default for repeat is OFF e Track repeats the track that is playing e All repeats the disc that is playing Playing MP3 CD MP3 is the format for storing digital audio An audio CD quality song can be compressed into the MP3 format with very little loss of quality while taking up much less space CD R RW discs that have been encoded in MP3 format can be played on the DVD player See Using an MP3 under the Audio System s section in the vehicle s owner manual Selecting Folders and Songs When an MP3 disc is inserted in the player the navigation screen appears The folders and songs can be changed by navigating through the file system The DVD player plays the songs in the or
554. tion Maps This section includes basic information that you need to know about the map database The maps are stored on a DVD The United States Canada and Puerto Rico are contained on one disc Detailed Areas Road network attributes are contained in the map database for detailed areas Attributes include information such as street names street address turn restrictions etc A detailed area includes all major highways service roads and residential roads The detailed areas include points of interest POI such as restaurants airports banks hospitals police stations gas stations tourist attractions historical monuments etc The map database may not include data for newly constructed areas or map database corrections that are completed after the production of the disc The navigation system provides full route guidance in the detailed map areas Limited Guidance Areas Any area that is not classified as detailed is a limited guidance area Limited guidance streets are displayed on the map but route guidance may not be given on these streets Some POI categories such as the city center POI category and some street addresses are included in the limited guidance areas The navigation system informs through voice prompts when you are traveling into a limited guidance area where route guidance is not available The street maps and the directional arrow displayed on the navigation system can then be used to determine
555. tion you can get the following e Unusual wear Poor handling e Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards 6 62 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 33 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare tire See Spare Tire on page 6 96 for additional information How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire
556. tion for more information 4 29 To use the point of interest destination entry method by selecting a category 1 Press the DEST hard key 2 Select the Y 3 Select the Browse POI Categories screen button to view the list of POI categories 4 Select a category The system displays available POI names in the selected category 5 Select the Go screen button next to the POI The map screen with the destination marked displays 6 Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route screen button 7 Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started See Getting Started on Your Route later in this section for more information 4 30 Address Book The address book entry method lets you select a destination by selecting an address that has been stored in the address book dd ress Book oc A 3RD ST DETROIT MI Address Book Touch to access the Address Book screen From this screen an address that already exists can be selected as the destination To use the address book entry method A 2 Press the DEST hard key Select the LA screen button A list of the address book addresses display Select the Go screen button next to the destination The map screen with the destination marked displays Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route
557. tion will cause the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the wipers are parked off the liftglass Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftglass and liftgate will not open The liftglass and liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation A CAUTION Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate trunk hatch open or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk hatch or liftgate Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk hatch open e Close all of the windows e Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel e Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 38 On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located o
558. tment The door can be removed Rear Seat Armrest For vehicle with an armrest storage compartment located by the second row seat pull the loop at the top of the armrest out to lower the armrest Push the button on the front of the armrest and pull the top up to open the compartment Sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition needs to be turned to ON RUN or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active When RAP is active the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off or until a front door is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 for more information There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof Manual Open Manual Close To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the driver s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will re
559. to exit 06 OOS OOOQQ 01010 DOO 10 EJECT amp Press to eject or reload a disc DVD Video Screen 3 Press the DVD button located under 3 to transmit IR codes for DVD mode on POWER Press to turn the Headrest DVD RSE system Video Screen 3 on and off TV Video Screen 3 This button is not used with the SOURCE Press to select between Monitor 3 system Monitor 4 or AV INPUT Any video equipment A i i DVD Video Screen 4 Press the DVD button located connected to the AV inputs automatically overrides urider4 to transmit IR codes for DVD mode on the source selection Video Screen 4 TV Video Screen 4 This button is not used with the system 3 102 SOUND AROUND ON OFF Press to turn the FM Transmitter power on or off MUTE X For DVD Only Press to turn off the headphone sound Press again to turn the sound on again PIX Picture Selection Press to adjust the picture s On Screen Display OSD Each time this button is pressed the picture adjustment OSD cycles through bars for BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST COLOR and TINT Use the right left navigation arrows to adjust the setting This feature automatically shuts off id another button is pressed or adjustments are not made within six seconds SOUND AROUND SELECT Press to select an FM transmitter channel The SOUND AROUND SELECT lets the DVD audio play over the vehicle s sound system by tuning the radio to one of the six FM frequencies listed below e CH1
560. to state the name If not currently driving on a route the system automatically creates the voice tag destination as the final destination If driving on a route the system automatically creates the voice tag destination as a stopover Up to three stopovers can be created 4 87 Storing Voice Tags From the address book entry information page press the Add Voice tag screen button The system responds Name Please and you will have four seconds to record a name The system asks for confirmation of the name before saving it as a voice tag Navigation Help Navigation Help This command instructs the system to assist with navigation commands Display Commands Use the following display commands to set the display mode Display set day mode Sets the display to daytime mode Display set night mode Sets the display to night mode Display set auto mode Sets the display to automatic mode The system changes between day and night mode automatically System help Instructs the system to assist with display commands 4 88 Radio Commands The following are radio commands that can be accessed by clearly stating the commands exactly as they are written Radio band select AM radio band select FM radio band select XM radio band select satellite Instructs the system to go to either the AM FM or XM if equipped Radio select frequency AM radio select frequency FM Instruc
561. to the previous track Turn this knob clockwise to go to the next track When playing an MP3 the rear seat operator can power on the RSE video screen and use the remote control to navigate through the MP3 CD Messages If Disc Read Error appears on the display and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons e lf a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format e Ifthe map DVD disc was installed into the CD slot See Installing the Map DVD under Maps on page 4 15 for more information e Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play e You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play e The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down e The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again e There may have been a problem while burning the CD e The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer 4 77 DVD Player The player can be used for DVD audio and DVD video DVD video will not display on the navigation screen unless the vehicle is in PARK P It will operate on the rear seat entertainment screens while the vehicle is moving The Rear Seat Entertainment RSE video screen will start play of the DVD when a DVD video has been inserted
562. tomatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service 2 52 OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar After the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada con
563. tomatically disabled To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system you should normally leave StabiliTrak on However you should turn StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it or if you are driving in extreme off road conditions and require more wheel spin See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 31 To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off see StabiliTrak System on page 5 6 There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear e One condition is overheating which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time e The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 39 e The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions e The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service See your dealer retailer The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle s fuel cap is not tightened properly See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 42 Reinstall the fuel
564. ton until the parking lamps turn off e Turn on the hazard warning flashers e Turn the ignition switch on and then off The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences The engine will run for 10 minutes after each remote start Or you can extend the engine run time by another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame and before the engine stops For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes The additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start After your vehicles engine has been started two times using the remote vehicle start button or a single remote start with one time extension the vehicle must be started with the key After the key is removed from the ignition the vehicle can be remote started again The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition the hood is not closed or if there is an emission control system malfunction and the check engine light comes on Also the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC
565. tract when the sunroof is closed 2 65 Express Open Express Close To express open the sunroof fully press and release the rear of the driver s side switch The sunroof will open automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To express close the sunroof fully press and release the front of the driver s side switch The sunroof will close automatically To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof but can also be opened manually The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full open position From the comfort stop position press the rear of the driver s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full open position When the sunroof is opened an air deflector will automatically raise The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed Vent The sunroof has an express vent open feature From the closed position press the rear of the passenger s side switch to vent the sunroof To stop the sunroof partway press the switch a second time To close the sunroof press and hold the front of the passenger s side switch To stop the sunroof partway release the switch 2 66 Anti Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing the anti pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction The sun
566. trol is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats See Power Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 8 Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Features on page 1 7 Power Lumbar The controls used to operate the power lumbar feature are located on the outboard side of the seats e To increase lumbar support press and hold the front of the control e To decrease lumbar support press and hold the rear of the control e To raise the height of the support press and hold the top of the control e To lower the height of the support press and hold the bottom of the control Let go of the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support Your vehicle has a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled See Memory Features on page 1 7 for more information Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support Adjust the seat as needed Heated Seats If the front seats have the heated seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the climate control panel lt Heated Seatback To heat only the seatback press the top button with the heated seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature se
567. ts the system to go toa specific frequency on either AM or FM Radio select channel XM radio select channel satellite Instructs the system to go to a specific channel on the XM band if equipped Radio help Instructs the system to assist with radio commands CD Commands The following are CD MP3 and DVD commands that can be accessed by clearly stating the commands exactly as they are written CD DVD Disc Use this command to select a CD DVD or disc that is currently loaded CD DVD Disc select track one two three etc Instructs the system to select a specific track number CD DVD Disc select next folder Use this command to select the next folder on the MP3 or audio DVD CD DVD Disc select previous folder Use this command to select the previous folder on the MP3 or audio DVD CD help DVD help Disc help Instructs the system to assist with CD and DVD commands Auxiliary Commands The following auxiliary commands can be accessed by clearly stating the commands exactly as they are written The commands are available when the auxiliary source is available Aux Auxiliary Use this command to select the auxiliary device when a device is connected Voice Help Voice help Provides a description of help commands that can be used 4 89 42 NOTES 4 90 Section 5 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 5 2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 0 0 5 2 De
568. tside temperature and how must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important Use the following chart to determine how much the It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle vehicle can weigh based upon the vehicle model and and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry options See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Escalade ESV AWD 6 2L V8 7 800 Ibs 3 538 lt 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversions The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8 6 for more information 5 46 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongu
569. ttings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seatback off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low s Heated Seat and Seatback To heat the entire seat press the bottom button with the heated seat and seatback symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the heated seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected three for high two for medium and one for low The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off If you want to use the heated seat feature after you restart the vehicle you will need to press the appropriate heated seat button again If your vehicle has heated and cooled seats see Heated and Cooled Seats on page 1 6 Heated and Cooled Seats If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat feature the buttons used to control this feature are located on the climate control panel Cooled Seat To cool the entire seat press the button with the cooled seat symbol This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high medium and low and to turn the cooled seat off Indicator bars next to the symbol de
570. uel cap be sure to get vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed the right type Your dealer retailer can get one or on any surface other than the ground for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside properly This may cause the malfunction indicator of the fill opening before operating the nozzle lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and Contact should be maintained until the filling emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp is complete PO pgo aga Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION A CAUTION An electric fan under the hood can start up and Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release near the center of the grille Push the secondary hood rel
571. under certain conditions 6 99 Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm soapy water use mild dish washing soap Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently so that the speaker will not be damaged Clean spots with just water and mild soap Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water 6 100 Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 13 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or
572. ure allows up to three stopovers to be added to the current route between the start point and final destination Once a stopover has been added the points can be edited or deleted To add a stopover f 2 Press the DEST hard key Select the Add Stopover screen button This button only appears if a route has been calculated Using the desired method of entering a destination enter the stopover See Destination previously for more information Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started To add the second and third stopovers press the DEST hard key then select the Add screen button where the next waypoint should appear on the route Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be started To delete a stopover from the current route Ak 2 Press the DEST hard key Select the Delete screen button for the desired stopover to delete The system displays a pop up confirmation message Touch Yes to delete the stopover touch No to cancel this operation Select the route preference Fastest Shortest or Other The system calculates and highlights the route Select the Start Guidance screen button The route is now ready to be s
573. urrent slot If the disc is not removed from the slot the system pulls it back in after 10 seconds and starts playing it To eject all discs press and hold the eject hard key The system displays the disc number being ejected 4 72 Playing an Audio CD AM FM xm AUX 12 02 Random DISC WP Pause Play Touch this button to pause the CD This button will then change to the play button Touch the play button to play the CD Random Touch this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order Touch Random again to turn off random play DISC Touch this screen button to view the list of loaded disc s Select the disc to play Rewind Touch and hold this button to rewind quickly through a track selection You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to stop rewinding The display will show the elapsed time of the track gt gt Forward Touch and hold this button to fast forward quickly through a track selection You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to stop fast forwarding The display will show the elapsed time of the track K D V Seek To seek tracks press the up arrow to go to the next track Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played If either arrow is pressed more than once the player continues moving backward or forward through the CD The sound mutes while seeki
574. using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system Always reset the engine oil life to 100 after every oil change It will not reset itself To reset the Engine Oil Life System 1 Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC 2 Press and hold the SET RESET button on the DIC for more than five seconds The oil life will change to 100 If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started the Engine Oil Life System has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manuf
575. utomatically turn on When the headlamps are changed to high beam the fog lamps also go off When the high beam headlamps go off the fog lamps will come on again Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Instrument Panel Brightness Af E3 Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights and is located next to the exterior lamp control Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights Turning the knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control of Dome Off Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened Entry Lighting The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature When the doors are opened the dome lamps wi
576. vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 93 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories If the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away 6 105 Fuses and Circuit Breakers If the vehicle is a Two mode Hybrid see the Two mode Hybrid manual for more information The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible thermal links This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette
577. verheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 6 31 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message along with a low coolant condition can indicate a serious problem If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you e Climb a long hill on a hot day e Stop after high speed driving e Idle for long periods in traffic e Tow a trailer See Towing a Trailer on page 5 44 If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 6 32 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come
578. w remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body 1 47 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 1 48 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat 1 49 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the
579. while the vehicle is raised Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle CAUTION Continued 6 78 CAUTION Continued To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks A A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need is stored under the storage tray which is located on the driver s side trim panel over the rear wheelhouse 2 Remove the wing nut B used to retain the tool bag by turning it counterclockwise 3 Turn the knob A on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket Regular Wheelbase shown 4 Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block Extended Wheelbase similar retainer by turning the wing nut C counterclockwise 1 Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up on the finger depression under the jack symbol 6 79 The tools you will be using include the following To access the spare tire D Jack Handle B Wheel Blocks Extensions elec Handle Pe peneeh tenn A Hoist Assembly G Tire Wheel Retainer B H
580. wn When accessing the third row seats if your vehicle has them from the outside of the vehicle press the button on the panel behind either rear door One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked 1 23 Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat s from the Third Row Seats or Outside A CAUTION Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats if your vehicle has them do the following 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat Notice Fol
581. ws or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The power window switches are located on the driver door In addition each door has a switch for its own window The front power window switch operates with two positions for both up and down movement and the rear power window switch operates with one position for up and two positions for down movement Press the switch to the first position to lower the window to the desired level Pull the switch up to raise the window The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP that allows you to use the power windows once the ignition has been turned off For more information see Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 26 Express Down Up Windows Windows with the express feature allow the windows to be raised and lowered all the way without holding the switch Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate the express feature The express mode can be canceled at any time by briefly pressing or pulling the switch Express Window Anti Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express up is active the window will stop at the obstruction and auto rever
582. xit the menu If you do not exit pressing the customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs e The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN e The trip fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed e The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited e A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features A CAUTION Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked e Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system e Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 5 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone
583. y Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws e Legal fines e Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices e Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles e Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service e Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required e Trip Routing Service Limit of six requests per year e Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders are required Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment e Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer
584. y Power RAP in the owners manual for more information Video Display Screens DVD CDIMPS PLAYER The video display screens are located on the backside of each head restraint Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage can occur See Cleaning the Video Screens later in this section for more information 3 97 Using the RSE System DVD Player The loading slot for the DVD player is located at the top of the head restraint Insert the disc partially into the loading slot with the printed side facing the rear of the vehicle The DVD player automatically draws the disc in Loading displays on the screen along with a disc indicator and playback starts If the disc is inserted incorrectly the DVD player ejects the disc and No Disc displays Some DVDs do not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or previews If the DVD does not begin playing at the main title refer to the on screen instructions 3 98 The DVD player can be controlled by using the buttons located below the video display screen or by using the buttons on the system s remote control See Remote Control later for more information The following discs are compatible with the DVD player e DVD Video A DVD that has video e CD DA A CD that has music or sound content only e CD Video A CD that has a movie e CD R RW A disc that ha
585. y and economically eas OS BRAKE 2 United States version shown Canada similar 3 34 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle s speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The vehicle s odometer works together with the Driver Information Center DIC The Trip odometer can be set See Trip Odometer under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 for more information The odometer mileage can be checked while the vehicle is not running Simply press the trip stem on the instrument panel cluster If the vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero For more information see Trip Odometer under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 48 Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
586. y belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 43 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly A CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 53 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing t
587. y control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 94 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional informati
588. y spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5 32 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 6 76 5 31 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse anda forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to
589. y standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant ina rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Child Restraint Systems A CAUTION A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infan

Cadillac 2009 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents